JP2020072999A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance the convenience of a player after a replay display result is derived, without making the player have a sense of discomfort.SOLUTION: When game media is thrown in by a player after a replay display result is derived and a game is completed until the next game can be started after replay derivation time setting means sets the number of bets, neither the number of bets stored in the storage means nor a game value stored in game value storage means is updated. When game media is thrown in by the player after the replay derivation time setting means sets the number of bets and the next game can be started, the game value stored in the game value storage means can be updated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of playing a game.

  In a slot machine in which a predetermined number of bets are set and a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) are variably displayed when a start operation is performed, the display result of the variably displayed identification information is displayed on the variable display section. Some have been configured to give a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined display result is obtained.

  As a technology related to this type of slot machine, for example, the probability of winning a replay is increased and the probability of winning a bonus or a small role is controlled to a replay time set to the same probability as in the normal time, and the player is played at the replay time. There is known a slot machine that displays the number of medals (a net increase in number) won by the player (for example, refer to Patent Document 1). Further, for example, there is known a slot machine which displays the number of medals to be paid out when a small winning combination is won at a replay time when the fixed number of medals are paid out (for example, refer to Patent Document 2).

JP, 2008-6223, A (for example, paragraph [0070] etc.) JP, 2009-5971, A (for example, paragraph [0225], paragraph [0331], etc.)

  In the slot machines described in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2, when the payout of medals is notified, the fact that one event of payout of medals has occurred is notified by notifying the payout number of medals or the net increase number. is doing.

  The present invention prevents the update of the game value after the re-play display result is derived from being performed prior to the setting of the bet number, so that the re-play display result is derived without causing any discomfort. It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine that can improve the convenience of the player after being played.

In order to solve the above problems, the slot machine of the present invention,
Equipped with a variable display unit that can variably display multiple types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
After variably displaying the variable display unit, a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the display result,
A gaming value storage means for storing a gaming value that can be used for setting the number of bets,
Bet number storage means for storing the bet number set for one game;
Re-game derivation time setting means for setting the bet number so that the next game can be started without consuming the game value owned by the player when the re-game display result is derived,
Path switching means for switching the flow-down path of the game medium input by the player to the discharge side path discharged to the outside or the intake side path taken inside.
A switching control means for controlling the route switching means,
The slot machine is
When a game medium is thrown in by a player while a game is being played, it is also possible to update the bet number stored in the bet number storage means and the game value stored in the game value storage means. Without updating
When the player inserts a game medium after the game ends without deriving the replay display result, and the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is less than a predetermined upper limit number. The number of bets stored in the bet number storage means is updated, and when the upper limit number is reached, the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means is updated,
In the case where the game medium is input by the player after the replay display result is derived and the game is over until the number of bets is set by the replay derivation time setting means and the next game can be started, Neither the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means nor the game value stored in the game value storage means is updated, and the bet number is set by the re-game derivation setting means. When a game medium is input by the player after the game is started and the next game can be started, the game value stored in the game value storage means can be updated.
The switching control means,
After the game ends without deriving the replay display result, the game medium is loaded without determining whether or not the game value stored in the game value storage means has reached the upper limit number. Perform the first possible setting process for setting that it is possible,
After the replay display result is derived, the game is over, the bet number is set by the regame derivation time setting means, and before the determination of whether or not the insertion of the game medium is detected, the gaming value It is determined whether or not the gaming value stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit number, and when the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means has not reached the upper limit number, the game medium The second possible setting process for setting that it is possible to insert is executed, and when the game value stored in the game value storage means has reached the upper limit number, the game medium cannot be inserted. Performs the first impossibility setting process for setting that
After the bet number is set, when the insertion of the game medium is detected in a state where the game medium can be inserted, it is determined whether or not the game value stored in the game value storage means reaches the upper limit number. If it is determined that the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means reaches the upper limit number, a second impossibility setting process is performed to set that the insertion of the gaming medium is impossible,
After the game ends without deriving the re-play display result and the bet number stored in the bet number storage means reaches the upper limit number, the insertion of the game medium is detected in a state where the game medium can be inserted. Also, when the re-play display result is derived, the game ends, and the bet number is set by the re-game derivation time setting means, and then the insertion of the game medium is detected in a state where the game medium can be inserted. Also, when a game value stored in the game value storage means reaches a maximum number, it is determined by a common determination process, and the game value stored in the game value storage means is determined. When the number reaches the upper limit, the common second non-setting process is performed,
A common switching process is performed both when the first disable setting process is performed and when the second disable setting process is performed, thereby setting that the game medium cannot be loaded. In this case, the route switching means is controlled so that the flow-down route of the game medium input by the player becomes the discharge-side route,
By performing the common switching process both when the first possible setting process is performed and when the second possible setting process is performed, it is set that the game medium can be loaded. If there is, the route switching means is controlled so that the flow-down route of the game medium input by the player becomes the intake side route,
A first event that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a second event that can occur with the occurrence of the first event and that is different from the first event can occur;
A first notification executing unit capable of executing a first notification capable of specifying that the first event has occurred when the first event has occurred,
A second notification means capable of specifying that the first event has occurred when the first event has occurred can be executed by the second notification means, and the second event has occurred when the second event has occurred. A second notification executing means capable of executing a third notification capable of specifying that
When the first event occurs and the second event does not occur, the first notification means executes the first notification, and the second notification means executes the second notification,
When the first event and the second event occur, the first notification means executes the first notification, the second notification means does not execute the second notification, and the third notification is issued. Run.
Furthermore, a gaming machine according to another aspect,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the slot machine 1 in the second embodiment),
A first event (for example, payout of a medal in the second embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a winning combination of a small combination in the second embodiment), and the first event occurs In addition, a second event different from the first event (for example, in the second embodiment, the net increase in medals reaches a prescribed number) can occur.
A first notification effect executing means (for example, in the second embodiment, which can execute a first notification effect (for example, a medal acquisition sound in the second embodiment) that notifies that the first event or the second event has occurred. Speakers 53, 54),
A second notification effect execution means (for example, the second notification effect execution unit (for example, the acquired number display and the specified number arrival display in the second embodiment) that notifies that the first event or the second event has occurred. In two embodiments, a liquid crystal display 51) is provided,
When the first event occurs and the second event does not occur, the first notification effect execution unit executes the first notification effect and the second notification effect execution unit executes the second notification effect, so that the first event The occurrence is notified (for example, in the second embodiment, the part that performs the process of Ss5 when Y in Ss1 and N in Ss3 in FIG. 23),
When the first event and the second event occur, one of the occurrences is notified by the execution of the first notification effect by the first notification effect executing means, and the other notification is notified by the second notification effect executing means of the other. Notification is made by execution of the effect (for example, in the second embodiment, a part that performs the process of Ss4 when Y in Ss1 and Y in Ss3 in FIG. 23).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

Furthermore, a gaming machine according to another aspect,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a slot machine 1 in the third embodiment),
A first event (for example, payout of a medal in the third embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a small prize is won in the third embodiment), and it occurs regardless of the occurrence of the first event. And a second event different from the first event (for example, in the third embodiment, the number of AT games added) can occur.
A first notification effect execution means (for example, a medal acquisition sound and an AT game number addition sound in the third embodiment) that notifies that the first event or the second event has occurred (for example, In the third embodiment, the speakers 53, 54),
A second notification effect execution means (for example, an acquired number display and an AT game number addition display in the third embodiment) that notifies that the first event or the second event has occurred (for example, In the third embodiment, a liquid crystal display 51) is provided,
When the first event occurs and the second event does not occur, the first notification effect execution unit executes the first notification effect and the second notification effect execution unit executes the second notification effect, so that the first event The occurrence is notified (for example, in the third embodiment, when Y in St2 and N in St3 in FIG. 26, the process of St5 is executed),
When the second event occurs and the first event does not occur, the first notification effect execution unit executes the first notification effect and the second notification effect execution unit executes the second notification effect, and thus the second event The occurrence is notified (for example, in the third embodiment, when N in St2 and Y in St6 in FIG. 26, the process of St5 is executed),
When the first event and the second event occur, one of the occurrences is notified by the execution of the first notification effect by the first notification effect executing means, and the other notification is notified by the second notification effect executing means of the other. Notification is given by execution of the effect (for example, in the third embodiment, a part that executes the process of St4 when Y is obtained in St2 and Y in St3 in FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

A game medium detecting unit (for example, a inserted medal sensor 31 in the modified example 4) for detecting the inserted game medium (for example, a modified example in the modified example 4),
A gaming value (for example, a credit counter which is a credit value in Modified Example 4) that can be used for setting the number of bets according to a betting operation (for example, an operation to the MAXBET switch 6 in Modified Example 4) is stored. A game value storage means (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in Modification 4),
A bet number storage unit (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in the modified example 4) that stores the bet number set for one game (for example, the value of the BET counter in the modified example 4). ,
According to the detection result by the game medium detection means (for example, in modification 4, YES in S30 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the bet number and the game value storage means stored in the bet number storage means are stored. A game medium detection time updating means for updating any of the stored game values (for example, S33 to S35 and S40 in FIGS. 39 to 41 in the modification 4),
When the re-game winning prize (for example, replay, first to second replay in modification 4) occurs (for example, in modification 4, YES in S12 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the gaming value is increased. Re-game derivation time updating means for updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means so that the next game can be started without using it (for example, in modified example 4, S14 in FIGS. 39 to 41, And S15).
According to this feature, when the re-game winning occurs, the next game can be started without using the game value.

The first phenomenon is that an advantageous amount advantageous to the player (for example, in the second embodiment, the payout number of medals) is given,
The second phenomenon is that the total amount of advantageous amount given to the player (for example, a net increase in the second embodiment) becomes a predetermined amount (for example, a prescribed number in the second embodiment). To do.
According to this feature, even when notifying that each of different events relating to the advantageous amount advantageous to the player has occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

When the first event and the second event occur, the second notification effect execution means displays the occurrence of the second event on the display device (for example, the liquid crystal display 51 in the second embodiment). It is characterized in that the second notification effect is executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to more give an impression that the second event has occurred.

An event having a higher priority for notification to the player than the first event is set as the second event (for example, in the third embodiment, the AT game number is added and displayed),
The first notification effect executing means or the second notification effect executing means executes the first notification effect or the second notification effect by displaying on the display device that the second event has occurred (for example, in the third embodiment. , A portion for displaying the AT game number addition in St4 and St7 in FIG. 26)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to more give an impression that the second event has occurred.

Advantageous period control means (for example, in modified example 1) for controlling during an advantageous period (for example, AT in modified example 1) in which the expected value of the gaming value given to the player is higher than the gaming value used by the player. , A portion controlled by the AT in the processing of FIG. 19),
When the control of the advantageous period is started, a net increase counting means (for example, in the modified example 1, which starts counting the net increase obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player from the game value given to the player, 20) which performs the processing of FIG.
And a notification effect executing means (for example, a portion for performing the process of FIG. 28 in the modified example 1) for executing the notification effect for informing that the net increase number counted by the net increase number counting means has reached one specified number. ,
The acquisition number counting means ends the counting of the acquisition number when the advantageous period is over and the controllable state during the advantageous period is not reached again by the time when the predetermined period elapses (for example, in the modified example 1, FIG. Part of the process of ending when 50 games have passed after the end of AT),
The gaming machine, when the number of acquisitions counted by the number-of-acquisition counting means reaches a prescribed number of 1 and falls below a prescribed number of 1 and falls below a prescribed number of 1 and reaches the prescribed number of 1 again, Further, there is further provided a regulation means (for example, a portion which does not perform the processing of Sh6 when Y in Sh4 of FIG. 28 in Modification 1) until the execution of the notification effect is finished until the counting of the net multiplication by the net multiplication counting means is completed. It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the advantageous period ends and the control becomes possible again during the advantageous period before the predetermined period elapses, the notification production is performed again for the specified number of times that the notification production was once performed. Since it is restricted from being played, it is possible to prevent the player from making an impression that the gaming value has decreased after the advantageous period ends.

An acquisition number counting means (for example, a portion for performing the processing of FIG. 20 in the modified example 1) for counting the number of the player's gaming value acquired during the advantageous period;
A specific effect capable of executing a specific effect different from the notification effect when a predetermined condition (for example, in the modified example 1, winning cherry and being controlled by AT and remaining within 5 games in AT) is satisfied. And an execution unit (for example, a portion that performs the process of FIG. 29 in the modified example 1),
When the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect overlap, the notification effect execution unit executes the specific effect without executing the notification effect, and the specific effect execution unit executes the specific effect. After that, when an event in which the gaming value increases occurs and the number of acquisitions counted by the number-of-acquisition counting means has reached one specified number, the notification effect executing means executes the notification effect (for example, modification 1). In FIG. 28, when Sh5 is Y, Sh6 is not processed, and when Sh5 is N, Sh6 is processed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow in which the notification effect is executed when the event in which the gaming value increases occurs is not broken, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. So that the game can proceed.

  It should be noted that both the number of game values given to the player and the number of game values obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player from the game value given to the player as the number of acquired game values. including.

  In addition, the overlap between the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect includes both the case of overlapping in a part of the period and the case of overlapping in the entire period. In addition, "when the execution of the notification effect overlaps the execution of the specific effect", in other words, it can be said that the execution timing of the notification effect is the same as the execution timing of the specific effect. In this case, the execution start does not necessarily have to be the same, and includes the case where at least a part of the execution periods of both effects are the same period.

An acquisition number counting means (for example, a portion for performing the processing of FIG. 20 in the modified example 2) that counts the number of times the player has acquired the gaming value during the advantageous period;
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the notification effect when a predetermined condition (for example, the addition condition shown in Sj3 of FIG. 25 in the modified example 2) is satisfied (for example, in FIG. 31, in the modified example 2). And a portion for performing the processing of Sr6 shown in FIG.
When the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect overlap, the specific effect execution means executes the notification effect without executing the specific effect, and the notification effect execution means performs the notification effect. When the predetermined condition is satisfied after the execution, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect (for example, in Modification 2, when Sr5 in FIG. 31 is Y, Sr6 is not executed, and Sr5 is N). Is the part that processes Sr6)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the specific effect is changed, the flow in which the specific effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied is not broken, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable. can do.

  It should be noted that both the number of game values given to the player and the number of game values obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player from the game value given to the player as the number of acquired game values. including.

  In addition, the overlap between the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect includes both the case of overlapping in a part of the period and the case of overlapping in the entire period. In addition, "when the execution of the notification effect overlaps the execution of the specific effect", in other words, it can be said that the execution timing of the notification effect is the same as the execution timing of the specific effect. In this case, the execution start does not necessarily have to be the same, and includes the case where at least a part of the execution periods of both effects are the same period.

Advantageous events obtained by the player (for example, in the modified example 3, the number of medals acquired (the net increase in medals), the number of paid out medals, and the number of digested games since the start of AT) are the predetermined number of occurrences (for example, When a specific game history (100, 250, 500, 1000, ... Predetermined number) (for example, in the modified example 3, the number of medals acquired after the start of AT becomes a predetermined number) To the player (for example, in the modified example 3, the continuous winning of the number of additional games, the bonus winning of the predetermined number of games, and the distribution of the premier effect of the predetermined number of distributions) can be given to the player. For example, in the modified example 3, steps Sd9, Se3, and Se4 executed by the sub control unit 91 in FIGS. 33 and 34),
By executing a specific display indicating that the specific game history has been reached (for example, in modified example 3, the number notification effect 502, 521 in FIG. 38), a game history notification for notifying that the specific game history has been reached Means (for example, in Modification 3, in steps Sd14 to Sd17, Sf1, and Sf3 executed by the sub-control unit 91 in FIG. 35 and FIG. 37),
38. A bonus amount display (eg, in modified example 2) in FIG. 38, the bonus notification effect 504, 506, 510 indicating the bonus amount as the amount of the bonus granted (for example, additional game number, predetermined game number, predetermined distribution number). , 523) to notify that the privilege has been granted (for example, in modified example 3, steps Sd14 to Sd17, Sf6 executed by the sub-control unit 91 in FIGS. 35 and 37). , Sf7 processing),
A display mode in which the privilege giving notification unit changes the specific display executed by the game history notification unit to the privilege amount display when the special game history is given and the privilege is given (for example, a modified example). 38, the privilege amount display is executed in a partially destroyed pattern, a completely destroyed pattern, a zoom pattern, a shuffle pattern, and a character change pattern effect pattern in FIG. Execute the continuous winning notification production of that production pattern)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to notify that the privilege has been granted by executing the privilege amount display in a display mode in which the specific display is changed to the privilege amount display when the privilege has been granted in the specific game history. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the privilege has been given by the specific game history, as compared with the slot machine that does not execute the privilege amount display in the display mode in which the specific display is changed to the privilege amount display.

A game medium detecting unit (for example, a inserted medal sensor 31 in the modified example 4) for detecting the inserted game medium (for example, a modified example in the modified example 4),
A gaming value (for example, a credit counter which is a credit value in Modified Example 4) that can be used for setting the number of bets according to a betting operation (for example, an operation to the MAXBET switch 6 in Modified Example 4) is stored. A game value storage means (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in Modification 4),
A bet number storage unit (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in the modified example 4) that stores the bet number set for one game (for example, the value of the BET counter in the modified example 4). ,
According to the detection result by the game medium detection means (for example, in modification 4, YES in S30 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the bet number and the game value storage means stored in the bet number storage means are stored. A game medium detection time updating means for updating any of the stored game values (for example, S33 to S35 and S40 in FIGS. 39 to 41 in the modification 4),
By playing a re-game display result (for example, replay in modified example 4, first and second replay) (for example, in modified example 4, YES in S12 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the game Re-game derivation time updating means for updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means so that the next game can be started without using the value (for example, in modified example 4, in FIG. 39 to FIG. 41). S14, S15),
After the replay display result is derived, delay control means for performing delay control for delaying the timing at which the next game can be started until the release condition is satisfied (for example, in Modification 4, FIGS. 39 to 41). And S13) in
The release condition is satisfied when the detection result by the game medium detection unit becomes the release result (detected by the specific sensor) (for example, in Modification 4, S91 in FIG. 42),
The game medium detection time updating means,
The number of bets stored in the bet number storage unit is a predetermined upper limit number when the game medium is detected by the game medium detection unit after the game ends without deriving the re-play display result. When it is less than (3), the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is updated, and when the upper limit number is reached, the game value stored in the game value storage means is updated. Update means at game medium detection time (for example, in Modification 4, S33 to S35 in FIGS. 39 to 41),
After the replay display result is derived, the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is updated by the regame derivation time updating means and the next game can be started, and then the game medium detecting means is started. By detecting the game medium by the second game medium detection updating means for updating the game value stored in the game value storing means (for example, S40 of FIG. 40 in the modified example 4, FIG. 39). In addition to the processing of S10 to S12, the processing is executed after S21 after the bet number setting is completed and it is determined that the credit is possible in S19 (see FIG. 43 (c)). Including.
According to this feature, even after the re-play display result is derived, after the inserted game medium, the bet number is updated by the re-game derivation update means and the next game can be started. Since it is the detected game medium, the game value can be updated according to the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated after the re-game display result is derived, before the bet number is set. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the replay display result is derived, without making the player feel uncomfortable. Also, delay control is performed after the re-game display result is derived, and the delay control is canceled by inserting the game medium and the detection result by the game medium detecting means being the release result. As a result, even when the number of bets is updated to the player by deriving the re-play display result, the next game cannot be started without inserting the game medium, and the game medium is inserted. This can make you think that the next game is ready to start.

  It should be noted that the upper limit number may be a predetermined number, may be one number, or may be a number determined according to the controlled game state. Further, the upper limit number may be the same as a predetermined number with which the game can be started, or may be a number larger than the predetermined number.

  After the replay display result is derived, the game medium whose game value can be updated is the next game when the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is updated by the replay derivation time updating means. It is only necessary for the game medium to be detected after the game can be started, and for example, the re-game derivation time updating means updates the bet number stored in the bet number storage means and the next game can be started. It may be a game medium detected after a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined period, end of a predetermined process, etc.) has been established after that (for [Allowable timing of insertion / settlement after replay winning in Modification 4] ] Column (b)).

  The detection result (hereinafter, also referred to as an update result) of the game medium detection means for updating either the bet number or the game value by the game medium detection time update means and the release result for satisfying the release condition are input. The detection result of the same detection means may be used as long as it is the detection result of the detection means for detecting the played game medium, and the release result is the same as the detection means for determining whether or not it is the update result. Whether the detection result of the detection means of (1), the detection result of a part of the detection means (specific sensors) of the plurality of detection means (a plurality of sensors) for determining whether or not the update result has been obtained, It may be a detection result of a detection unit (a special sensor not involved in the update result) different from the detection unit for determining whether or not.

A game medium detecting unit (for example, a inserted medal sensor 31 in the modified example 4) for detecting the inserted game medium (for example, a modified example in the modified example 4),
A gaming value that can be used to set the number of bets according to a betting operation (for example, an operation on the one-sheet BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 in the modified example 4 (for example, a credit value in the modified example 4). A game value storage means for storing a credit counter (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in Modification 4),
A bet number storage unit (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in the modified example 4) that stores the bet number set for one game (for example, the value of the BET counter in the modified example 4). ,
According to the detection result by the game medium detection means (for example, in modification 4, YES in S30 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the bet number and the game value storage means stored in the bet number storage means are stored. A game medium detection time updating means for updating any of the stored game values (for example, S33 to S35 and S40 in FIGS. 39 to 41 in the modification 4),
By derivation of the re-game display result (for example, replay, first to second replay) (for example, in modification 4, YES in S12 of FIGS. 39 to 41), without using the game value. Re-game derivation time updating means for updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means so that the next game can be started (for example, in modified example 4, S14 and S15 in FIGS. 39 to 41). ,
After the replay display result is derived, delay control means for performing delay control for delaying the timing at which the next game can be started until the release condition is satisfied (for example, in Modification 4, FIGS. 39 to 41). And S13) in
The release condition is satisfied when the detection result by the game medium detection unit becomes the release result (detected by the specific sensor) (for example, in Modification 4, S91 in FIG. 42),
The game medium detection time updating means,
The number of bets stored in the bet number storage unit is a predetermined upper limit number when the game medium is detected by the game medium detection unit after the game ends without deriving the re-play display result. When it is less than (3), the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is updated, and when the upper limit number is reached, the game value stored in the game value storage means is updated. Update means at game medium detection time (for example, in Modification 4, S33 to S35 in FIGS. 39 to 41),
After the replay display result has been derived, the replay derivation time updating means starts updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means, and then the game medium detecting means detects the game medium. As a result, the second game medium detection time updating means for updating the game value stored in the game value storing means (for example, in Modification 4, refer to FIG. 44, [Allowment of insertion / settlement after replay winning] About timing ”column))).
According to this feature, even after the re-game display result is derived, the inserted game medium is the game medium detected after the re-game derivation time updating means starts updating the bet number. As a result, the game value can be updated according to the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated after the re-game display result is derived, before the bet number is set. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the replay display result is derived, without making the player feel uncomfortable. Also, delay control is performed after the re-game display result is derived, and the delay control is canceled by inserting the game medium and the detection result by the game medium detecting means being the release result. As a result, even when the number of bets is updated to the player by deriving the re-play display result, the next game cannot be started without inserting the game medium, and the game medium is inserted. This can make you think that the next game is ready to start.

  It should be noted that the upper limit number may be a predetermined number, may be one number, or may be a number determined according to the controlled game state. Further, the upper limit number may be the same as a predetermined number with which the game can be started, or may be a number larger than the predetermined number.

  After the replay display result is derived, the gaming value can be updated after the update of the bet number stored in the bet number storage means by the replay derivation update means is started later. Any detected game medium may be used. For example, after the re-game derivation time updating means starts updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means, a predetermined condition (a predetermined period elapses, a predetermined process ends). And the like) may be detected after the above conditions are established (for example, in Modification 4, refer to FIG. 44 and refer to the [Allowable timing of insertion / settlement after replay winning] column).

  The detection result (hereinafter, also referred to as an update result) of the game medium detection means for updating either the bet number or the game value by the game medium detection time update means and the release result for satisfying the release condition are input. The detection result of the same detection means may be used as long as it is the detection result of the detection means for detecting the played game medium, and the release result is the same as the detection means for determining whether or not it is the update result. Whether the detection result of the detection means of (1), the detection result of a part of the detection means (specific sensors) of the plurality of detection means (a plurality of sensors) for determining whether or not the update result has been obtained, It may be a detection result of a detection unit (a special sensor not involved in the update result) different from the detection unit for determining whether or not.

  The present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied. It is an internal structure diagram of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram showing a configuration of a slot machine. 6 is a flowchart showing the control contents of a startup process (main) executed by the main control unit at startup. 6 is a flowchart showing the control contents of a startup process (main) executed by the main control unit at startup. It is a flow chart which shows the control contents of the game processing which a main control part performs after a setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs at regular intervals. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs at regular intervals. It is a figure for explaining the kind of special combination (bonus), the symbol combination of the special combination, and the technical matters related to the special combination. It is a figure for explaining the kind of small winning combination, the symbol combination of small winning combinations, and the technical matters related to the small winning combinations. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of replay, the symbol combination of replay, and the technical matter relevant to replay. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol combination of the transition appearance, and the technical matter related to the transition appearance. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state and RT. It is a figure for demonstrating the navigation target combination in AT. It is a figure for explaining reel control at the time of winning a plurality of re-game combinations. It is a figure for explaining reel control at the time of winning a plurality of small winning combinations. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which a sub control part performs at regular intervals. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the net increase count process which a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flow chart which shows the contents of control of information production execution processing which a sub control part performs in timer interruption processing (sub) in a 1st embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of control of information production execution processing which a sub control part performs in timer interruption processing (sub) in a 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of control of AT game number addition lottery processing which a sub control part performs in a timer interruption processing (sub) in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of control of information production execution processing which a sub control part performs in timer interruption processing (sub) in a 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of 3rd Embodiment. 16 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the notification effect execution process executed by the sub control unit in the timer interrupt process (sub) in the first modification. 21 is a flowchart showing the control contents of a continuous effect execution process executed by a sub-control unit in a timer interrupt process (sub) in the first modification. In modification 2, it is a flowchart showing the control contents of the notification effect execution process that the sub control unit executes in the timer interrupt process (sub). In modification 2, it is a flowchart showing the control content of the addition effect execution process that the sub control unit executes in the timer interrupt process (sub). FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the presence / absence of execution of the notification effect and the transition of the net increase in medals in Modification 1. 21 is a flowchart showing a specific example in which the notification effect is regulated in Modification 1. 21 is a flowchart showing a specific example in which the specific effect is restricted in the second modification. 16 is a flowchart showing the control contents of a timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the sub control unit in Modification Example 3. 16 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the AT continuous lottery process executed by the sub-control unit in Modification 3. In modification 3, it is a flowchart showing the control contents of the effect pattern selection processing executed by the sub-control unit. In Modification 3, (A) is a diagram showing an example of the number notification effect, (B) is a diagram showing an example of continuous winning notification of a partial destruction pattern, and (C) is a continuous winning of all destruction patterns. The figure which shows an example of a notification production, (D) is a figure which shows an example of a continuation winning notification production after completion of all productions. 16 is a flowchart showing the control content of the BET processing executed by the main control unit in Modification 4. 16 is a flowchart showing the control content of the BET processing executed by the main control unit in Modification 4. 16 is a flowchart showing the control content of the BET processing executed by the main control unit in Modification 4. 16 is a flowchart showing the control contents of a lip freeze process executed by the main control unit in Modification 4. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the game in Modification 4; FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the game in Modification 4; FIG. 11 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration in a main board included in a pachinko gaming machine in a modification 5.

[Regarding First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described.

[Example of slot machine configuration]
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is composed of a housing 1a having a front surface opened, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 2, inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right) in which plural kinds of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged. (Reels) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three continuous symbols among the symbols arranged on these reels 2L, 2C, 2R are seen through the transparent window 3 provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 3, “black 7”, “net 7 (hatched 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, and 21 kinds of plural kinds of mutually distinguishable symbols such as "plum", "watermelon", "cherry", "bell", "orange" are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three tiers in the see-through window 3 provided substantially in the center of the reel panel 1c of the front door 1b.

  The reels 2L, 2C, 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4) so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are continuously displayed on the see-through window 3. While being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the see-through window 3 as a display result.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side are provided. , Are provided. The reel LED 55 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be independently illuminated.

  At the position corresponding to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the front door 1b, there is provided a horizontally long rectangular see-through window 3 that allows the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to be seen through from the front side. The reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be visually recognized from the player side via the player.

  For the front door 1b, a medal insertion portion 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which medals are paid out, and a credit (the number of medals stored as a gaming value owned by the player) are used within the range. MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the maximum bet number (3 in any of the game states in the present embodiment) of the bet number defined according to the game state, stored as a credit Settlement switch 10 that is operated to settle the medals used to set the number of medals and bets (return the medals used to set the number of credits and bets), and the start to operate the game when starting the game. Stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R operated when stopping the rotation of switch 7 and reels 2L, 2C, 2R respectively, and a production switch for production use. 56 are respectively provided so as to be operated by the player.

  In the present embodiment, of the three reels 2L, 2C, 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that first stops is referred to as the first stop reel, and its stop is the first stop, and its stop operation is the first. This is referred to as one stop operation (or first stop). Similarly, the second stop reel is referred to as a second stop reel, the stop thereof is referred to as a second stop, and the stop operation thereof is referred to as a second stop operation (or a second stop). The reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, the stop is called the third stop or the final stop, and the stop operation is called the third stop operation (or the third stop).

  Further, on the front door 1b, a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, an error code indicating the content when an error occurs, and the like are displayed. Game auxiliary indicator 12, 1BETLED14 for notifying by lighting that the number of bets is set to 1, 2BETLED15 for notifying by lighting that the number of bets is set to 2 and by lighting that the number of bets is set to 3 3BET LED 16 for notifying, insertion request LED 17 for notifying that a medal can be inserted by lighting, start valid LED 18 for notifying by lighting that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is effective, weight (previous game start Waiting for the reel to start rotating since a certain period has not passed since Weight in LED19 for notifying by lighting a a is that during the game display section 13 in the replay LED20 is provided for informing is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game, which will be described later.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the bet number by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is provided, the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, there are provided left, middle, and right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) for notifying by lighting that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. Has been.

  Further, below the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R on the front door 1b, there is provided a lower panel 1d on which a title of the slot machine 1 and a payout table 1 described later are printed.

  Inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting an error state described later and a reset operation for canceling a stopped state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value described later or confirming the set value described later. A set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time, valid / invalid of a stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of BB described later. Enable / disable of the automatic settlement function for controlling the stop switch 36a for selecting, and the automatic settlement process (the process of settlement (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of BB described later. An automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting invalidity and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 are provided in a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) which will be described later provided inside the casing 1a. ) Side or the medal payout opening 9 side for selectively switching the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting the medals that have been inserted from the medal insertion section 4 and have flowed down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L capable of detecting the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R described above is provided inside the housing 1a. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9 and a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  An overflow tank 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a is provided on the side of the hopper unit 34. Inside the overflow tank 35, there is provided a full tank sensor 35a formed of a pair of left and right conductive members provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals. It is now possible to detect that the amount of stored medals stored inside is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount when conducting by contacting through the medals stored inside, that is, that the overflow tank is full. Is becoming

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stopped state in normal times, and a setting key switch 37 in a setting change state A reset / setting switch 38 functioning as a setting switch for changing a set value of a winning probability (ball-out rate) of an internal lottery described later, and a power switch 39 operated when turning the power on / off are provided. ..

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or credits are used to set the bet number. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, the pay line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. Become. In the present embodiment, when the prescribed number of bets is set to 3 regardless of the gaming state and the prescribed number of bets is set, the pay line LN becomes effective. In addition, when the maximum number of medals has been inserted among the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the transparent window 3 of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is a combination of winning symbols. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN is set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the middle of the reel 2L, the middle of the reel 2C, the middle of the reel 2R, that is, the middle. Has been defined as. In the present embodiment, only one pay line is applied, but a plurality of pay lines may be applied.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning line, ineffective lines LM1 to LM4 are set separately from the winning line LN. The ineffective lines LM1 to LM4 are not those in which the winning is determined by the combination of the symbols arranged in the ineffective lines LM1 to LM4, and the ineffective lines are formed when the combinations of the symbols constituting the specific winning are aligned in the winning line LN. By having a configuration in which a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) that becomes a prize when aligned on the pay line LN in any one of LM1 to 4 is arranged, the symbols forming a specific prize on the pay line LN This makes it easy to recognize that the combinations are complete. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the invalid line LM1 and the reel 2L are set over the reel 2L, the reel 2C, the reel 2R, that is, the upper line, that is, the invalid line LM1 set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction. Lower stage, lower stage of reel 2C, lower stage of reel 2R, that is, ineffective line LM2 set across symbols arranged horizontally in the lower stage, upper stage of reel 2L, middle stage of reel 2C, lower stage of reel 2R, that is, to the lower right Four types of invalid line LM3, which is set across the symbols lined up, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM4 which is set across the symbols lined up to the right, are invalid lines. It is defined as LM.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R rotate and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R continuously change. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped and the display result is derived and displayed on the see-through window 3.

  Then, all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped to complete one game, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter, also referred to as a winning combination) on the pay line LN is a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. When the game is stopped, a prize is generated, and the number of medals determined according to the prize is given to the player and added to the credit. When the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, in the pay line LN, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the game state is stopped as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the game state is shifted to the combination of the symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all reels are stopped. Also, the control of one unit for executing the game (game control) starts when all the controls accompanying the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is turned on. When operated, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (millisecond).

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and the symbols for 80 × 21 (the number of symbol frames per reel) = 1680 frames are changed, so that a maximum of 4 symbols are drawn in 190 ms. It will be possible. That is, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of the symbols, for a total of five symbols.

  Therefore, for example, when the symbols displayed in the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is used as a reference, the symbols from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbol can be displayed in the lower row, in each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch when any of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated It is possible to display symbols arranged within 5 frames including the symbol on the pay line LN.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game control board 40 controls the game state, and the effect control board 90 causes the game state. The effect according to is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates drive power for the electric components that form the slot machine 1, and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with an AC100V power supply from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40. It is adapted to be supplied to the effect control board 90 connected via. In addition, a command transmission line from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91, which will be described later, and a power supply line that supplies power from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 are connected via a single-system cable and connector By connecting all the connectors that connect these cables to each board, each section on the production control board 90 side becomes operable and a command from the main control section 41 can be received. Become. Therefore, unless the command transmission line for transmitting a command from the main control unit 41 is connected to the effect control board 90, power is not supplied to the effect control board 90 side, and only the effect control board 90 side operates. There is nothing to do.

  The power supply board 101 is connected to the hopper motor 34b, the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power supply switch 39.

  On the game control board 40, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the insertion medal sensor 31, and the door opening described above. The detection switch 25, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected, and the above-mentioned payout sensor 34c, full tank sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101, The detection signals of these connected switches are input.

  Further, on the game control board 40, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start effective LED 18, the wait LED 19, the replay LED 20, and the BET described above are provided. The switch valid LED 21, the left, middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, the set value indicator 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected, and the above-described power source substrate 101 is used. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric parts are driven under the control of a main control unit 41, which will be described later, mounted on the game control board 40.

  On the game control board 40, a main control unit 41, a random number generation circuit 42, a sampling circuit 43, a switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45, a solenoid drive circuit 46, an LED drive circuit 47, an electric power failure detection circuit 48, a reset circuit 49. Is installed.

  The main controller 41 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 executes a control program stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing relating to the progress of the game, and directly or indirectly controls each unit of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value each time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in this embodiment, the range is set to 0 to 65535. The main CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to obtain the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number value (hereinafter, this function is called a hardware random number function). As the random number for internal lottery described later, the random number extracted by the hardware random number function is not used as it is, but is processed and used by software. Further, the main CPU 41a also has a function of updating the value of a specific register by the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (main) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is called a software random number function). ..

  The switch detection circuit 44 takes in the detection signal input from the switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101 and transmits it to the main control unit 41. The motor drive circuit 45 transmits the motor drive signal output from the main controller 41 to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main controller 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30. The LED drive circuit transmits the LED drive signal output from the main controller 41 to various indicators and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power failure detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and, when detecting a voltage drop, outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the main control unit 41. The reset circuit 49 gives a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the power supply is unstable, such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off.

  The CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 executes a program read from the ROM to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1.

  As described above, in the main control unit 41, the CPU 41a executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 41b. Therefore, hereinafter, the main control unit 41 (or the CPU 41a) executes (or performs processing) means Specifically, the CPU 41a executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on boards other than the game control board 40.

  The RAM 41c included in the main controller 41 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, at least part of the contents of the RAM 41c is saved for a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, all the areas of the RAM 41c are used as backup RAMs, and even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, all the contents of the RAM 41c are saved for a predetermined period.

  The ROM 41a included in the main control unit 41 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 41b stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 41a to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 41b, table data and the like forming a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 41a to transmit control signals which are various control commands from the game control board 40 are stored.

  In the RAM 41c included in the main control unit 41, a game control data holding area is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. A DRAM, for example, is used as the RAM 41c, and a refresh operation for maintaining the stored data content is required. The CPU 41a has a built-in refresh register for performing this refresh operation. For example, the refresh register consists of 8 bits, of which the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented each time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b. Therefore, the update of the stored value in the refresh register is performed every execution time of one instruction in the CPU 41a.

  The main control unit 41 sends various commands to the sub control unit 91. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is transmitted only in one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41.

  The main controller 41 receives the detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the input port. Then, the main control unit 41 executes a basic process of shifting in stages according to the detection states of various switches input from these input ports.

  Further, the main control unit 41 can interrupt the basic process when the interrupt occurs and execute the interrupt process. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (main) described later is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time when the process that repeats according to the control state completes once in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). As a result, between the present time and the next timer interrupt process (main), the process that repeats in accordance with the control state must be completed at least once.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is set so as to prohibit other interrupts during execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, the main control unit 41 gives priority to a predetermined order. The interrupt to be executed is set. If another interrupt factor occurs during execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process ends, a new interrupt will occur at that point. It will be.

  A production switch 56 is connected to the production control board 90, and a detection signal of the production switch 56 is input.

  The production control board 90 is connected to production devices such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LEDs 55 described above. The rendering devices are driven under the control of a sub-control unit 91, which will be described later, mounted on the rendering control board 90.

  In the present embodiment, the output control of the production device such as the liquid crystal display 51, the production effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 is performed by the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the production control board 90. However, in addition to the sub control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the production device is mounted on the production control board 90 or another board, and the sub control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output pattern of the rendering device may be determined by the sub-control unit 91, and the output control unit may control the output of the rendering device based on the output pattern determined by the sub-control unit 91. The output control of the effect device is performed by both of the control units.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are illustrated as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, and is mechanically driven, for example. A display device or a mechanically driven role object may be applied as the production device.

  The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer provided with a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d similarly to the main control section 41, and a sub control section 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED effect circuit 52, an LED drive circuit 93 for controlling the drive of the effect LED 52, the reel LED 55, and a sound output circuit 94 for controlling the sound output from the speakers 53, 54. When the power is turned on or when the initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a, and a detection signal input from the production switch 56 connected to the production control board 90 are detected. Switch detection circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information Clock device 97, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1, and when a voltage drop is detected, a voltage drop signal indicating that fact is output to the sub CPU 91a. Etc. are mounted, the sub CPU 91a receives commands transmitted from the game control board 40, performs various controls for performing effects, and controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. Control directly or indirectly.

  The reset circuit 95 is set to have a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40, and the sub control unit 91 performs the main control when the power is turned on. It is designed to be activated earlier than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power failure detection circuit 98 is set to have a lower voltage for outputting the voltage drop signal than the power failure detection circuit 48 for outputting the voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. In, the sub control unit 91 detects the power failure at a stage later than the main control unit 41, and performs the power interruption process (sub) described later.

  Like the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when a command is received from the main control unit 41, and acquires the command transmitted from the main control unit 41. , Execute the command reception interrupt process to store in the buffer. Further, the sub-control unit 91 executes a timer interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, every time the number of inputs of the system clock reaches a certain number, that is, at every certain interval.

  Further, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process even if the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when the interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at 1, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if the interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur simultaneously.

  Further, the backup power supply is also supplied to the sub control unit 91 at the time of power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power supply is supplied. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 91c is saved for a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, the entire area of the RAM 91c is used as a backup RAM, and even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, all the contents of the RAM 91c are saved for a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, the entire area of the RAM 91c is used as a backup RAM, and even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, all the contents of the RAM 91c are saved for a predetermined period.

[About setting value]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout rate of medals changes according to the set value. Specifically, the payout rate of medals is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the internal lottery described later. The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases in stages.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 37 and then turn on the slot machine 1. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by one (when the setting 6 is further operated, the setting is returned to the setting 1). .. Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is set as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game is allowed to proceed.

  Further, in order to confirm the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on in a state where the bet number is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, so that the setting value is confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot proceed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state ends, and the state in which the game can proceed is restored.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The power failure determination processing is performed, and when it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination processing, the power interruption processing (main) is executed. In the power interruption process (main), the RAM 41c stores destructive diagnosis data (5AH in this embodiment) in which one of the bits is 1, that is, specific data other than 0, and is stored in all areas of the RAM 41c. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the stored data becomes 0, and is stored in the RAM 41c. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of the values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in the present embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. For example, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  Then, the main control unit 41 calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 41c at the time of startup regardless of whether the system reset or the user reset, and the value of the destruction diagnosis data. And the RAM parity is 0 and the value of the destruction diagnosis data is correct, the processing state of the main control unit 41 is returned to the state before the power failure based on the data stored in the RAM 41c. However, if the RAM parity is not 0 (1) or the value of the destruction diagnosis data is incorrect, it is judged as a RAM error and the RAM error error code is set in the register to control the RAM error error state. However, the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the normal error state, the RAM abnormal error state is not released even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change state described above. It will not be released until it is released.

  In the present embodiment, all the data stored in the RAM 41c is retained by the backup power supply even during a power failure, and the main control unit 41 determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal when the power is turned on. In this case, the configuration is such that the control state before power failure is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c. However, of the data stored in the RAM 41c, only the data necessary for restoring the control state at the time of power failure is backed up, and the power is supplied. The configuration may be such that the control state before the power failure is restored based on the data backed up at the time of turning on.

  Also, when returning to the control state before power failure when turning on the power, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control status before power failure, the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player. However, it is not necessary to restore all the states of the input ports to the state before the power failure.

[About initialization]
Next, the initialization of the RAM 41c of the main controller 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into important work, non-saved work, general work, special work, unused area, and stack area.

  The important work stores not only data that is inconvenient to initialize, such as various display devices and LED display data, I / O input / output data, and game time counters, but also the RT flag and RT remaining game count, which will be described later. It is a work to be done. The non-saved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and the value is always set regardless of whether the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of startup. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in BB, and a game state flag described later. The special work is a work in which data that is initialized only before starting the setting, such as various software random numbers, is stored. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which the data saved from the register of the main control unit 41 is stored, and the unused stack area, like the unused area, has one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later. However, if it is established, it will be initialized, but the stack area in use is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the data in the RAM 41c when the setting key switch 37 is turned on, when a RAM error occurs, when BB ends, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned off. When is not destroyed, when four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, four types of initialization of different regions initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is initialization performed before the setting key switch 37 is in the on state at the time of startup and when the setting change state is entered, or initialization when a RAM error occurs. Then, in the storage area of the RAM 41c, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except the important work and the used stack area, that is, the areas from the non-saved work to the unused stack area are initialized. It The initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In the initialization 2, in the storage area of the RAM 41c, a general work, an unused area and an unused stack area, that is, an area from the general work to the unused stack area is It is initialized. Initialization 3 is initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is off at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. In initialization 3, the initialization 3 includes a non-saved work, an unused area, and an unused area. The used stack area is initialized. The initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In the initialization 4, the unused area and the unused stack area of the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, the initialization 1 is performed before shifting to the setting change state, but may be performed at the end of the setting change state, or both before shifting to the setting change state and at the end of the setting change state. May be.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a RAM abnormality error occurs when the power is turned on, the initialization 1 is executed and the control state before that is initialized, but at this time, it is important. The RT flag assigned to the work and the number of remaining RT games are retained without being initialized. On the other hand, the game state flag assigned to the general work will be initialized as the initialization 1 is executed.

[About internal lottery]
As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a predetermined number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state (usually inside, BB (RB)), and is determined according to the gaming state. It is possible to start the game on condition that the specified number of bets has been set. In the present embodiment, the pay line LN is activated at the time when a specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line LN (hereinafter, the activated pay line LN is simply referred to as the pay line LN). A prize is awarded when a combination of symbols called a combination is completed. The winning combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be broadly divided into small combinations involving payout of medals and the next game that can be started without the need to set the bet number. There are a game combination (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") and a special combination (hereinafter, also referred to as "bonus") accompanied by a transition to a game state advantageous to the player. Below, the small winning combination and the re-playing combination are collectively called a general winning combination. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery described later and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM. Note that, hereinafter, when referring to “replay combination” and “replay”, various replays shown in FIGS. 12 and 16 are collectively referred to.

  Of the winning flags of each of these winning combinations, the winning flags of the small winning combination and the re-playing winning combination are valid only in the game in which the flags are set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flags of the special winning combination are The flag is valid until the combination of the allowed combinations is prepared by the flag, and is invalid in the game in which the combination of the allowed combinations is prepared. That is, once the winning flag of a special winning combination is won, even if the combination of winning combinations allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and carried over to the next game. Becomes

  In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the winning of each of the above-mentioned winning combinations is allowed (before the start switch 7 is detected) before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. To do. In the internal lottery, first, when the start switch 7 is detected, a random number value for the internal lottery (an integer of 0 to 65535) is acquired. Specifically, the value of the random number storage work assigned to the RAM 41c is set to the lottery work also assigned to the RAM 41c. Then, for each combination determined according to the game state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the numerical data stored in the lottery work, the value of the game state flag for specifying the game state, and the RT to be described later are specified. This is performed according to the number of determination values of each winning combination determined according to the value of the RT flag for betting, the number of bets and the set value. In addition, carryover of a special role means that if the special role is not won in the game that won the special role in the internal lottery, the winning status of the special role is carried over to the next game or later, and the special role is held until the special role is won. It is to maintain the winning state.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined corresponding to the winning combination of the internal lottery, the current game state flag value, the RT flag value and the set value is set to the random number value for the internal lottery (stored in the lottery work). It is determined that the winning combination has been won when the result of the addition overflows. Therefore, the winning combination is won with a probability (the number of judgment values / 65536) according to the size of the number of judgment values.

  When it is determined that one of the winning combinations is won, the winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, the upper byte of which is assigned as the special combination storing work in which the winning flag of the special combination is set, and the lower byte is the general combination winning combination. It is assigned as a general role storing work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special winning combination is won, the winning flag of the special winning combination indicating that the special winning combination has been won is set in the special winning combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general winning combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when the general combination is won, the winning flag of the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If none of the winning combinations and combinations of winning combinations are won, only the general winning combination storing work is cleared.

[Regarding reel stop control]
Next, the stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R executed in the reel rotation process in Sd3 of FIG. 7 will be described.

  The main control unit 41 refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts to rotate, and when the reel stops and there is still a reel that is still rotating. , Create a stop control table for each spinning reel. Then, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the spinning reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the reference stop control table is slipped. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  The table index is an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the table creation data is stored, from the reference address when referencing the table index, according to the setting status of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning status). The difference up to the address where the data is stored is registered. This makes it possible to obtain the difference according to the internal winning state and add the difference to the reference address to obtain the corresponding index data. Even if the winning situation of the winning combination is different, if the same control is applied, the same address is stored as index data. In such a case, refer to the same table creation data. Then, the stop control table is created.

  The table creation data is composed of a stop control table indicating the number of sliding pieces according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop situation.

  The stop control table that is referred to according to the reel stop state is that all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, left, This may differ depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, or the middle and right reels are stopped. Since it may differ depending on the stop position of the reel that has been completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced is registered for each spinning reel in each situation, and based on the start address of the table creation data, It is possible to identify the address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the situation of And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table, In such a case, the same stop control table will be referred to.

  The stop control table is data capable of specifying the number of sliding symbols for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stepping motors that make one revolution in a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167). That is, by driving the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R by 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R make one revolution. Then, 21 areas (comas) divided into 16 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one round of the reel, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and since the symbol numbers of 0 to 20 are assigned to the symbols of each reel from the reel reference position, the symbols 0 to 20 are assigned. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are sequentially assigned. Then, in the stop control table, the number of sliding frames for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and by expanding the stop control table, the number of sliding frames for each area number can be acquired. There is.

  As described above, in the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data, the area corresponding to each area number corresponds to the stop reference position (in the present embodiment, the perspective window). Slip when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at the timing (timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each area number) located in the area of the lower pattern of 3) This is a table in which the number of frames is set respectively.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the start address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, first, the table index is referenced, the index data corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, the table creation data is specified based on the acquired index data, and all reels are extracted from the specified table creation data. Acquires the address of the stop control table of each reel corresponding to the spinning state, expands the stop control table of each reel stored at the acquired address, and creates the stop control table for all reels.

  Also, when any one reel stops or when any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of the reel rotation, that is, the head address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is specified based on the specified table creation data, and the addresses of the stop control table of the stopped reels and the unstopped reels corresponding to the area numbers of the stopped positions of the reels are acquired from the specified table creation data. The stop control table for each reel stored is expanded to create a stop control table for an unstopped reel.

  Next, when the main control unit 41 effectively detects one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the spinning reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel To be more specific, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop operation position is determined based on the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected. The area number is identified and the reel stop control table for which the stop operation is detected is referred to, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the identified area number of the stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of the acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps until pulling in the acquired number of sliding frames to stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated by the calculated number of steps to stop. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the number of slide frames ahead of the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in the present embodiment, the transparent window 3 Area of the lower pattern) will be stopped.

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one reel is included in one table creation data. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop situation (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and a stop control table corresponding to a reel stop state (and a stopped position of a reel that has already stopped) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created by referring to is also unique to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and the reel stop situation (and the stop position of the reel that has already stopped). Therefore, when the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stopped position of the reel that has been stopped) all become the same condition, the reels are based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Will be controlled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is set as the number of sliding symbols, and it is possible to pull in a maximum of four frame symbols and stop the reel after detecting a stop operation. That is, the stop position of the symbol can be specified from a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. Further, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to pull in a maximum of four symbols and stop the reel after detecting the stop operation, and the stop is detected. Including the operation position, it is possible to specify the stop position of the symbol from the range of maximum 5 symbols.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the winning combinations has been won, the winning combination is drawn to the winning line LN to the maximum within the range of 4 frames, and the winning combination is drawn so as not to be aligned with the winning line LN. While creating a stop control table that defines the number of sliding pieces and controlling the reels to stop, if none of the winning combinations has been won, the stopping control that defines the number of sliding pieces is not available. Create a table and control the reel stop. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the pay line LN within the pull-in range of a maximum of four frames, the control to stop the winning combination is performed, and the winning is achieved. The winning combination is controlled so that the winning combination is stopped within the pull-in range of up to 4 frames.

  When a special role and a small role are simultaneously won, such as when the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, when the special role and the small role are simultaneously won, the winning small role is within the range of 4 frames on the pay line LN. The number of sliding pieces is set so that it can be pulled in to the maximum, and for the stop operation position where the winning small winning combination cannot be drawn within the winning line LN within a range of up to 4 frames, the winning special winning combination is placed in the winning line LN. A stop control table is created in which the number of sliding pieces is determined so that the reels are pulled in to the maximum extent, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the winning combinations that can win the winning range of a maximum of four frames can be aligned and stopped on the winning line LN, the control is performed so that the winning combinations are stopped and the winning combination is performed. If you can not draw a small winning combination with a maximum drawing range of 4 frames to the line LN, if you can stop the special winning combination with a maximum drawing range of 4 frames on the winning line LN, The control for stopping the winning combinations is performed, and for the winning combination not winning, the control for stopping the winning is stopped within the pull-in range of four frames. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the small winning combination on the pay line LN is prioritized over the special winning combination, and the special winning combination can be won only when the small winning combination cannot be drawn. In addition, when a special combination and a small combination can be drawn in at the same time, only the small combination is drawn in, and the small combination is not aligned on the pay line LN at the same time as the special combination.

  In the present embodiment, the special role and the small role are won at the same time, such as when the small role is won while the special role has been carried over from the previous game or when the special role and the small role are newly won at the same time. In this case, the winning small role is prioritized over the winning special role, and the special role is controlled to be aligned with the winning line LN only when the small role cannot be drawn in. When the two are simultaneously elected, the control of aligning the special role with the pay line LN is prioritized over the small role, and the control of aligning the small role with the pay line LN may be performed only when the special role cannot be drawn. ..

  When the special player and replay are elected at the same time, such as when the special player has been carried over from the previous game and the re-playing combination has been elected, when the special operation and the replay are elected at the same time, the maximum is on the pay line LN. Control is performed to align and stop the symbols of the re-play combination within the pull-in range of 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gaming combination or the symbols constituting the re-gaming combination to be won at the same time are arranged within 5 symbols on each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, that is, at intervals of 4 frames or less. Since it can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range of 4 frames, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player when the special combination and the re-gaming combination are simultaneously won. Instead, all re-playing roles will be awarded. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the re-game combination on the pay line LN is prioritized over the special combination, and the re-game combination is surely won. In addition, when a special combination and a re-game combination can be drawn in at the same time, only the re-play combination is drawn in, and the special combination is not arranged on the pay line LN simultaneously with the re-play combination.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 rotates the reels 2L, 2C, 2R after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started, until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. And the operation of stopping switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, the control for stopping the display result on the corresponding reel is performed. Even when the reel rotation is temporarily stopped due to the reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected after the reel rotation is restarted and until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. If the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, the reels that have not been rotated continue to be rotated, and control is performed to stop the display results on the corresponding reels.

  In the present embodiment, the control to stop the display result on the corresponding reel is performed on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, but the rotation of the reel is started. After that, even if the reel stop operation is not performed after the predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, it is considered that the stop operation is performed and the automatic stop control for automatically stopping each reel is performed. You can In this case, since the reels will stop without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any winning combination even if any winning combination is won.

  Next, various control contents executed by the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described.

[Startup processing (main)]
When the system reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the main control unit 41 performs the activation process (main) shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 5 and 6.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main control unit 41 first initializes the built-in device, the peripheral IC, the interrupt mode, the stack pointer, etc. (Sa2), and then initializes the values of the I register and the IY register. Yes (Sa3). By initializing the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table referred to when the interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address used when referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. .. These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa4), and the RAM parities of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c are calculated (Sa5).

  In step Sa6, it is determined whether the RAM parity calculated in step Sa5 is 0 or not. If the power interruption interrupt process (main) is performed normally, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in step Sa6, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. In this case, after executing the initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas of the RAM 41c except the used stack area and the important work (Sa22), whether the setting key switch 37 is on or not. If the setting key switch 37 is on, a setting change start command indicating that the setting is being changed is generated (Sa19), and the generated setting change start command is stored in the command buffer (Sa20). ) Of the timer interrupt processing (main) executed by the main control unit 41 described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 at regular intervals (interval of 0.56 ms). Allow write (Sa21), the setting change processing for such change of winning probability of winning, that is, the transition to the setting change state. Then, when the setting change processing is completed, the game processing shown in FIG. 7 is performed.

  If the setting key switch 37 is off in step Sa23, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa24), an error start command indicating a RAM abnormality is generated (Sa25), and the generated error start command is commanded. The buffer is stored in the buffer (Sa26), and the main control unit 41 described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 permits the timer interrupt processing (main) to be executed at regular intervals (interval of 0.56 ms) (Sa27). , Error processing, that is, a transition to a RAM error state. Then, when the RAM abnormal error state is released by, for example, operating the reset / setting switch 38 by a game shop clerk, the game process shown in FIG. 7 is performed.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa6, it is further determined whether or not the destruction diagnosis data is normal (Sa7). If the power failure process (main) is performed normally, the destruction diagnosis data should have been set, and if the destruction diagnosis data is not normal in step Sa7 (the destruction diagnosis data is stored at the time of power failure). (Other than 5A (H)), the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, so the process proceeds to step Sa22 to execute initialization 1 and then, at step Sa23, the setting key switch 37 is turned on. For example, the processing of Sa19 to Sa21 described above is performed to shift to the setting change processing, that is, the setting change state. Further, if the setting key switch 37 is off in the step Sa27, the above-described processing of Sa24 to Sa27 is performed, and error processing, that is, the RAM abnormal error state is entered. When the RAM abnormal error state is released, the game process shown in FIG. 7 is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sa7 that the destruction diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa8), and the unsaved work, unused area, and unused area in the RAM 41c are cleared. After performing initialization 3 for initializing the used stack area (Sa9), it is determined whether the setting key switch 37 is on (Sa10). If the setting key switch 37 is on, initialization 1 is executed. (Sa15), the processing of Sa19 to Sa21 described above is performed, and the setting change processing, that is, the setting change state is entered. Then, when the setting change processing is completed, the game processing shown in FIG. 7 is performed.

  If the setting key switch 37 is off in the step of Sa10, each register is returned to the state before the power failure, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa11), and the power failure recovery 1 command (see FIG. 8) is generated. And stores it in the command buffer (Sa12). Next, the power failure recovery 2 command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa13). Next, the power failure recovery 3 command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa14). Next, the power failure recovery 4 command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa15). Next, a hot start command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa16). Then, the main control unit 41 described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 permits the interrupt of the timer interrupt process (main) executed at regular intervals (interval of 0.56 ms) (Sa17), and ends before the power interruption. Return to the process that was being executed. If any of the game processes shown in FIG. 7 is performed before the power is cut off, based on the value of the program counter (PC) restored in Sa11, the process of Sd1 to Sd6 of the game process is performed. Of these, the process returns to what was being done before the power failure. Further, for example, when any of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 is performed before the power interruption, based on the value of the program counter (PC) restored in Sa11, Among the processes of Sk1 to Sk26 of the timer interrupt process, the process returns to the process performed before the power interruption.

[About various commands]
Next, a command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 will be described. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 includes 1-byte mode data indicating the type of command and 1-byte EXT data indicating the content of the command. The sub-control unit 91 determines the command type from the mode data and the command content from the EXT data.

  Each command is temporarily stored in the command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the command transmission process (main) executed by the timer interrupt process (main) shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. It is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in Sk16).

  When the sub-control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 displays the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the sounds output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the front door according to the type of the received command. It controls the lamps provided in 1b.

  The setting change start command is a command indicating that the setting change has started. The setting change start command is transmitted at the start of setting change. A value indicating that the setting change has started is set in the EXT data.

  The setting change end command is a command indicating that the setting change is completed and the set value selected by the setting change. The setting change end command is transmitted at the end of the setting change. In the EXT data, one of the six types of setting values selected by changing the setting is set.

  The error start command is a command indicating that an error has occurred. Any of eight types of errors is set in the EXT data. The error start command is sent at the start of error processing. The eight types of errors include an overflow tank overflow error indicating that the medals in the overflow tank 35 are full, a non-payment medal error indicating that the medals in the hopper tank 34a are gone, and a medal to be paid out is a hopper tank. 34a or the like, a payout medal clogging error indicating that the coin is clogged, a throwing signal abnormality error indicating that a medal detection abnormality has occurred in the medal selector, a reel rotation abnormality error indicating that the reel is not rotating normally, An illegal winning error indicating that the winning prediction flag for which a winning is expected from the result of the internal lottery does not match the actual winning result, and an RWM content error indicating a RAM abnormality are set.

  The error cancel command is a command indicating that the error has been cancelled. The error cancellation command is sent when error processing is canceled. A value indicating that the error has been canceled is set in the EXT data.

  The settlement start time command is a command indicating that the settlement of medals has started. The settlement start command is transmitted at the start of settlement processing. In the EXT data, either data indicating that the inserted medal has been settled or data indicating that the credited medal has been settled is set.

  The settlement completion command is a command indicating that the settlement of medals has been completed. The settlement completion command is transmitted at the end of the settlement process. A value indicating that the settlement has been completed is set in the EXT data.

  The medal insertion command is a command indicating that a medal has been inserted. The medal insertion command is transmitted when inserting a medal without adding credits. In the EXT data, a value indicating the number of inserted medals (any one of 1 to 3) is set.

  The credit increase command is a command indicating that the number of credited medals has increased. The credit increase command is transmitted at the time of inserting a medal accompanied by adding credit. A value indicating that the credit has increased is set in the EXT data.

  The game counter 1 command is a command indicating a count value of 0 to 127 that is counted each time a game is played. The game counter 1 command is transmitted when the operation of the start switch is accepted. A value indicating any one of the count values of 0 to 127 is set in the EXT data.

  The reel acceleration information command is a command indicating that the rotation of the reel has started. The reel acceleration information command is transmitted when the operation of the start switch is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating any one of the nine types of rotation start patterns of reels is set.

  The internal winning command is a command indicating whether or not the BB has been won and the RT state. The internal winning command is transmitted when the operation of the start switch is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not the BB has been won and the state of the RT is set.

  The winning number command is a command indicating the result of the internal lottery. The winning number command is transmitted when the start switch operation is accepted. A value indicating the result of the internal lottery is set in the EXT data.

  The BB inserted number 1 command is a command indicating the number of medals inserted in the BB game. The BB insertion number 1 command is transmitted when the reel starts rotating. A value indicating the number of inserted medals is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop acceptance 1 command is a command indicating that the first stop has been performed. The reel stop acceptance 1 command is transmitted when the operation of the stop switch is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating the acceptance state of each stop switch (that is, whether or not it has been operated) and the lighting state (whether or not lighting) of the LED incorporated in each stop switch is set.

  The reel sliding frame number 1 command is a command indicating the number of frames until the reel stops when the first stop is performed. The reel sliding frame number 1 command is transmitted when the operation of the stop switch is accepted. A value indicating the number of frames (0 to 4 frames) until the reel is stopped is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop position 1 command is a command indicating the position where the reel stops when the first stop is performed. The reel stop position 1 command is transmitted when the operation of the stop switch is accepted. A value indicating the reel stop position (frame numbers 0 to 20) is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop acceptance 2 command is a command indicating that the second stop is performed. The reel stop acceptance 2 command is transmitted when the operation of the stop switch is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating the acceptance state of each stop switch (that is, whether or not it has been operated) and the lighting state (whether or not lighting) of the LED incorporated in each stop switch is set.

  The reel sliding frame number 2 command is a command indicating the number of frames until the reel stops when the second stop is performed. The reel sliding frame number 2 command is transmitted when the operation of the stop switch is accepted. A value indicating the number of frames (0 to 4 frames) until the reel is stopped is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop position 2 command is a command indicating the position where the reel stops when the second stop is performed. The reel stop position 2 command is transmitted when the operation of the stop switch is accepted. A value indicating the reel stop position (frame numbers 0 to 20) is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop acceptance 3 command is a command indicating that the third stop is performed. The reel stop acceptance 3 command is transmitted when the operation of the stop switch is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating the acceptance state of each stop switch (that is, whether or not it has been operated) and the lighting state (whether or not lighting) of the LED incorporated in each stop switch is set.

  The reel sliding frame number 3 command is a command indicating the number of frames until the reel stops when the third stop is performed. The reel sliding frame number 3 command is transmitted when the operation of the stop switch is accepted. A value indicating the number of frames (0 to 4 frames) until the reel is stopped is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop position 3 command is a command indicating a position where the reel stops when the third stop is performed. The reel stop position 3 command is transmitted when the operation of the stop switch is accepted. A value indicating the reel stop position (frame numbers 0 to 20) is set in the EXT data.

  The game counter 2 command is a command indicating a count value of 0 to 127 that is counted each time a game is played. The game counter 2 command is transmitted after stopping all reels. A value indicating any one of the count values of 0 to 127 is set in the EXT data.

  The RT information 2 command is a command indicating whether or not a BB is won and the RT status. The RT information 2 command is transmitted when the operation of the start switch is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not the BB has been won and the state of the RT is set.

  The winning number 1 command is a command indicating the type of winning. The winning number 1 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process. In the EXT data, a value indicating the operating state of the BB (whether in the BB or not) and the type of winning is set.

  The winning number 2 command is a command indicating the type of winning. The winning number 1 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process. In the EXT data, a value indicating the operating state of the BB (whether in the BB or not) and the type of winning is set.

  The winning number command is a command indicating the number of medals to be paid out by winning. The winning number command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process. A value indicating the number of paid out medals is set in the EXT data.

  The BB payout number 1 command is a command indicating the payout number of medals at the time of BB. The BB payout number 1 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process during BB. In the EXT data, a value (upper 7 bits) indicating the number of paid-out medals in BB is set.

  The BB payout number 2 command is a command indicating the payout number of medals at the time of BB. The BB payout number 2 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process during BB. In the EXT data, a value (lower 7 bits) indicating the payout number of medals in BB is set.

  The BB end wait command is a command indicating that it is waiting for the BB end. The BB end wait command is transmitted when the BB ends. In the EXT data, a value indicating the type of BB waiting for the end (one type in this embodiment) is set.

  The BB end command is a command indicating that the BB ends. The BB end command is transmitted at the end of BB, at the start of automatic settlement, and at the start of stop processing. A value indicating the type of BB to be ended (one type in the present embodiment) is set in the EXT data.

  The RT information 1 command is a command indicating the state of RT. The RT information 1 command is transmitted at the end of the game. A value indicating the RT state is set in the EXT data.

  The BB operation type command is a command indicating whether or not BB is in progress. The BB operation type command is transmitted at the end of the game. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not the BB is in progress is set.

  The game end command is a command indicating the game state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is ended. The game end command is transmitted at the end of the game. In the EXT data, a value indicating the gaming state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is finished is set.

  The door command is a command indicating whether or not the front door 1b is opened. The door command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the setting change is started, the RWM content error is started, the game is ended, and the door is opened and closed. In the EXT data, a value indicating the open state of the door (whether it is open or closed) is set.

  The power failure recovery 1 command is a command indicating a count value of 0 to 127 that is counted each time a game is played. The power failure recovery 1 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. A value indicating any one of the count values of 0 to 127 is set in the EXT data.

  The power failure recovery 2 command is a command indicating whether or not BB is won and the state of RT. The power failure recovery 2 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not the BB has been won and the state of the RT is set.

  The power failure recovery 3 command is a command indicating whether or not BB is in progress and the number of inserted medals. The power failure recovery 3 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not BB is in progress and the number of inserted medals is set.

  The power failure recovery 4 command is a command indicating a game state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is finished. The power failure recovery 4 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating the gaming state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is finished is set.

  The hot start command is a command that indicates restarting without turning off the power. The hot start command is sent when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating that the power is restarted without being turned off is set.

[Game processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game processing executed by the main control unit 41.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6). ) Is sequentially executed, and when the game end processing is completed, the process returns to the BET processing again.

  In the BET process in the step Sd1, a bet number is set in a standby state, a prescribed number of bets is set according to the gaming state, and a process for starting the game is executed when the start switch 7 is operated. ..

  In the internal lottery process in the step Sd2, whether to allow the winning of each of the above-mentioned winning combinations based on the random number value for the internal lottery latched at the same time as the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in the step Sd1 (that is, display) Whether or not to permit the derivation of the result) is performed. In this internal lottery process, the winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results. In addition, when the special combination (BB or RB) is won by the internal lottery, the special combination carry-over flag is set. Then, as described above, the presence / absence of the special role carry-over flag is determined to determine the presence / absence of the special role carry-over, and the winning combination depending on the presence / absence of the carry-over (the special role is excluded from the internal lottery during the special role carry-over). Determination process is performed.

  In the reel rotation process in the step Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 7, the result of the internal lottery in the step Sd2 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. A process for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is executed in response to the detection of the operation.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R has stopped in the step Sd3, the winning is determined according to the display result derived to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. The process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed. It should be noted that when a special role is won, the special role carry-over flag is cleared in this processing.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined in step Sd4 that a prize has been generated, credits and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts corresponding to the prize.

  In the game ending process in the step Sd6, a process of setting a game state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  Further, in the game processing, a command is generated according to the progress control of the game, set in the command buffer, and transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

[Timer interrupt processing (main)]
8 and 9 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) that the main control unit 41 interrupts and executes the startup process and the game process at regular intervals (interval of 0.56 ms). Note that other interrupts are automatically prohibited during execution of the timer interrupt process (main).

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, in the timer interrupt process (main), first, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sk1).

  Next, a power failure determination process is performed (Sk2). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 48. If the voltage drop signal is input, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal was also input in the previous power failure determination process. It is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal has been input in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that there is a power failure, and the power failure flag indicating that effect is set.

  After the power failure determination process in the step Sk2, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (Sk3). If the power failure flag is not set, the process proceeds to Sk4, and the power failure flag is set. The power interruption process (main).

  In step Sk4, port input processing for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port is performed.

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 is incremented by 1 (Sk5). In this embodiment, the timer interrupt 1 is a branch process during a timer interrupt that controls the motor to control the start of the reel, and specifically, the processes of Sk9 to Sk11 such as a reel start process described later. Is done. Further, the timer interrupt 2 is a branch process during a timer interrupt that performs LED display control, time counter update, door open / closed state monitoring, control signal output control, and command and external output signal update. Specifically, processes of Sk12 to Sk17 such as an LED dynamic display process described later are performed. Further, the timer interrupt 3 is a branch process during a timer interrupt for detecting the passage of the origin of the reel, monitoring the switch input, and reading the random number value. Specifically, the timer passage 3 will be described later. Sk20 to Sk22, such as hourly processing, are performed. Further, the timer interrupt 4 is a branch process during timer interrupt for detecting the input of the stop switch and controlling the stop of the reel, and specifically, the process of Sk23 to Sk25 such as the stop switch process described later. Is done. In the step of Sk5, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value is looped in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0 ... Every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, referring to the branch counter value, it is judged whether it is 2 or 3, that is, the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 (Sk6), and when it is not the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4, that is, the timer interrupt. In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is confirmed whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are being started or are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are being started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process of outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sk10 described below and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sk24 described below is executed (Sk7).

  Next, referring to the branch counter value, it is determined whether or not it is 1, that is, whether it is a timer interrupt 2 (Sk8), and when it is not the timer interrupt 2, that is, when it is the timer interrupt 1, the reel motor. Reel start processing (Sk9) for controlling step time intervals at the time of starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sk10) for changing phase signal data of reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C. , 32R is stopped, a motor phase signal standby process (Sk11) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation is performed after a lapse of a certain time, and then the process proceeds to step Sk25.

  Further, in the case of the timer interruption 2 in the step of Sk8, the LED dynamic display processing (Sk12) for dynamically lighting various indicators, the control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port. (Sk13), a time counter updating process (Sk14) for updating various time counters, a door monitoring process (Sk15) for monitoring the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, a door command transmission request, etc., and set in the command buffer. After sequentially executing a command transmission process (Sk16) for transmitting various commands such as a setting change command, a return command, and an error command to the sub control unit 91, and an external output signal update process (Sk17) for updating an external output signal, Sk25 Go to step.

  Further, if it is the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 in the step of Sk6, further referring to the branch counter value, it is determined whether or not it is 3, that is, whether or not the timer interrupt is 4 (Sk18), and the timer If it is not an interrupt 4, that is, if it is a timer interrupt 3, it is checked whether or not the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that are rotating pass through the origin (passage of the reel reference position), and a reel rotation error is detected and stopped. Check if the preparation is completed (whether the stop preparation completion code is set), and if the preparation for stop is completed and it is rotating at a constant speed, operate the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel. Whether or not there has been a change in the detection state of the switches such as the origin passing process (Sk20) to be validated, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. After performing a switch input determination process (Sk21) for making a request for transmission of an operation detection command, a random number value reading process (Sk22) for reading numerical value data from the random number value register R1D and storing it in a random number value storage work, Sk26 is performed. Go to step.

  If the timer interrupt 4 is set at step Sk18, the stop stored in the work on the stop reel is stopped when the stop operation position is stored in the work on the stop reel in accordance with the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. A stop switch process (Sk23) that determines the stop position from the operation position and calculates how many steps to stop, and the number of steps until the stop calculated by the stop switch process is counted, and when the time comes to stop After the stop process (Sk24) for starting the brake by the two-phase excitation and the final stop process (Sk25) for the three-phase excitation after a fixed time from the start of the brake in the stop process, the process proceeds to step Sk26.

  In the step of Sk26, the register saved in the stack area in Sk1 is restored, and the process before the interrupt is returned.

[Type of winning combination, symbol combination of winning combination]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined symbol combination is completed on the pay line LN, the prize is won. The types of winning prizes are determined according to the gaming state, but roughly divided into big bonuses, bonuses with the transition to regular bonuses, small wins with payouts of medals, and setting of the number of bets. There is a re-playing role that enables the next game to be started without need.

  The big bonus may be indicated as BB and the regular bonus may be indicated as RB. Also, the big bonus and the regular bonus may be simply referred to as a bonus. In order for the winning of each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag for allowing the winning of the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

  10 to 13 are diagrams for explaining types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations. Further, FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a game state controlled by the main control unit 41 and a transition of RT.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the slot machine according to the present embodiment is controlled to be in a normal game state, inside 1, 2, RB, BB (RB), and further in a normal game state (hereinafter referred to as a normal game state. It is controlled to any one of RT0 to RT4.

  As shown in FIG. 10, two types of bonuses among the winning combinations are a big bonus (hereinafter, each big bonus is referred to as BB) and a regular bonus (hereinafter, each regular bonus is referred to as RB). included.

  The BB is won when the combination of "white 7-white 7-white 7" is aligned on the payline LN. The RB is won when the combination of "black 7-black 7-BAR" is aligned on the pay line LN.

  When the BB wins, a regular bonus in the BB (hereinafter, referred to as BBRB) is transferred to a big bonus controlled by each game. The big bonus ends on the condition that 316 or more medals have been paid out.

  When an RB wins, a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB) is transferred. The regular bonus ends on the condition that any part has won 6 times or 12 games have been consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the internal BB is controlled to 1 · RT0 from the internal winning to the winning, and the internal BB is controlled to 2 · RT0 from the internal winning to the winning. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, after the big bonus or the regular bonus (collectively referred to as a bonus) is finished, the normal / RT4 control is performed.

  Even if you win either BB or RB in the internal lottery to be described later, if you do not operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R at the appropriate timing to win these winning combinations, you will win these winning combinations. There is no such thing. The symbols (“black 7”, “white 7”, “mesh 7”) that make up BB and RB are not arranged within 5 frames on each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the small winning combination among the winning combinations will be described. Small wins include middle bell, downward bell, upper bells 1-8, middle watermelon, right downward watermelon, upper watermelon, lower cherry, middle cherry, 1 piece, right bell, right belli, Includes a rising right.

  The middle-level bell wins when the combination of "bell-bell-bell" is completed on the payline LN, and eight medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bells are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, when the middle bell is won in the internal lottery described below, the prize can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The downward-sloping bell is when any combination of “Replay-Bell-Replay”, “Replay-Bell-Plum”, “Plum-Bell-Replay”, and “Plum-Bell-Plum” is available on the winning line LN. Winning a prize and paying out eight medals.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position one level below the bell, and the replay and plum of the right reel 2R are arranged at a position one level above the bell. Therefore, if any combination of “Replay-Bell-Replay”, “Replay-Bell-Plum”, “Plum-Bell-Plum”, and “Plum-Bell-Plum” is available, the The combination of “” falls to the right, that is, is aligned with the invalid line LM3.

  Further, either the plum or the replay is arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and the bell is arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C. For this reason, it can be said that, as a general rule, when the player is winning the downward-sloping bell in the internal lottery described later, the player can win the prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Next, the upper bells 1 to 8 will be described. The upper stage bell 1 is won when the combination of "Replay-Orange-Orange" is completed on the payline LN. The upper-stage bell 2 is won when the combination of “Replay-Orange-BAR” is completed on the payline LN. The upper-stage bell 3 is won when the combination of “Replay-BAR-Orange” is completed on the payline LN. The upper stage bell 4 is won when the combination of "replay-BAR-BAR" is completed on the payline LN. The upper bell 5 is won when the combination of "plum-orange-orange" is completed on the payline LN. The upper stage bell 6 is won when the combination of "plum-orange-BAR" is completed on the payline LN. The upper bell 7 is won when the combination of "plum-BAR-orange" is completed on the winning line LN. The upper bell 8 is won when the combination of "plum-BAR-BAR" is completed on the payline LN.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L, the BAR and orange of the middle reel, and the BAR and orange of the right reel 2R are arranged one position below the bell. "Orange-Orange", "Replay-Orange-BAR", "Replay-BAR-Orange", "Replay-BAR-BAR", "Plum-Orange-Orange", "Plum-Orange-BAR", "Plum-BAR-" When any combination of "orange" and "plum-BAR-BAR" is prepared, the combination of "bell-bell-bell" is arranged in the upper stage, that is, the invalid line LM1.

  Further, in the left reel 2L, the replay and the plum are not arranged within 5 frames, and the orange and the BAR are not arranged within 5 frames for each of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. Therefore, even if one of the upper bells 1 to 8 is won in the internal lottery described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the winning design of the upper bell must be operated at proper timing. If you do, you won't win the top bell you win.

  The middle watermelon is won when the combination of "black 7-watermelon-watermelon", "white 7-watermelon-watermelon", and "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is complete on the pay line LN. When the middle watermelon wins, five medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, on the left reel 2L, either black 7, white 7, or watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, but for each of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, the watermelon is Not placed within 5 frames. Therefore, even if the middle watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, the middle watermelon is not won unless the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are operated at proper timing. ..

  The downward-sloping watermelon is won when the combination of "bell-watermelon-black 7" and "bell-watermelon-white 7" is completed on the payline LN. When the watermelon falling to the right wins, five medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one lower than the black 7, white 7, and watermelon, and the black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2R are watermelon. Since it is placed one position above, "Bell-Watermelon-Black 7" and "Bell-Watermelon-White 7" are available, "Black 7-Watermelon-Watermelon" and "White" The combinations of "7-watermelon-watermelon" and "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" are descending to the right, that is, aligned on the invalid line LM3.

  In the left reel 2L, the bells are arranged within 5 frames, but the watermelons of the middle reel 2C and the black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2R are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if a right-down watermelon is won in an internal lottery described later, if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at proper timing, the right-down watermelon will be won. There is no.

  The upper watermelon is won when the combination of "bell-black 7-replay" and "bell-white 7-replay" is completed on the payline LN. When the upper watermelon wins, five medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one lower than the black 7, white 7, and watermelon, and the black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C are watermelons. It is located one position below, and the replay of the right reel 2R is located one position below the watermelon, so "bell-black 7-replay" and "bell-white 7-replay". When any one of the combinations is prepared, the combination of “black 7-watermelon-watermelon”, “white 7-watermelon-watermelon”, and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is arranged in the upper stage, that is, the invalid line LM1.

  In the left reel 2L, the bells are arranged within 5 frames, but the black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C and the replay of the right reel 2R are not arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, even if the upper watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, the upper watermelon will not be won unless the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are operated at appropriate timings. ..

  The lower cherries will be won when the combination of "BAR-Orange-ANY (ANY is any symbol)", "BAR-BAR-ANY", and "BAR-Bell-ANY" are available on the pay line LN. .. Two medals are paid out when the lower cherries win.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, since the BAR of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the cherry, “BAR-orange-ANY (ANY may be any symbol)”, “BAR- When any combination of "BAR-ANY" and "BAR-Bell-ANY" is prepared, "Cherry" on the left reel is stopped at the lower stage, and the combination of "Cherry-ANY-ANY" is raised at the lower stage and rightward. That is, they are aligned with the invalid lines LM2 and LM4.

  Further, in the middle reel 2C, any one of orange, BAR, and bell is arranged within 5 frames, but in the left reel 2L, BAR is not arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, even if the lower cherry is won in the internal lottery described later, the lower cherry is not won unless the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is operated at an appropriate timing.

  The middle-tier cherry is won when the combination of "cherry-ANY-ANY" is completed on the payline LN. When the middle-tier cherry wins, one medal is paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, in the left reel 2L, cherries are not arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, even if the middle-tier cherry is won in the internal lottery described later, the middle-tier cherry is not won unless the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is operated at an appropriate timing.

  The winning combination is won when the combination of "black 7-cherry-net 7" is completed on the payline LN. When one hand wins, one medal is paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the black 7 of the left reel 2L, the cherry of the middle reel, and the net 7 of the right reel are not arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, even if one winning combination is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R are not operated at proper timing, 1 It won't win a single role.

  Rising bells on the winning line LN are "black 7-bell-orange", "white 7-bell-orange", "watermelon-bell-orange", "black 7-bell-BAR", "white 7-bell-bar". When any combination of "BAR" and "Watermelon-Bell-BAR" is completed, a prize is awarded and 10 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the black 7 and the white 7 of the left reel 2L and the watermelon are arranged at a position one level above the bell, and the orange and BAR of the right reel 2R are one level below the bell. Since it is located in the position, "black 7-bell-orange", "white 7-bell-orange", "watermelon-bell-orange", "black 7-bell-BAR", "white 7-bell-BAR" , If any combination of "watermelon-bell-BAR" is completed, the combination of "bell-bell-bell" goes up to the right, that is, it is aligned on the invalid line LM4.

  On the left reel 2L, one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, on the middle reel 2C, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, and on the right reel 2R, orange and BAR. One of them is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, as a general rule, when a rightward bell is won in an internal lottery described later, the player can win the prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Beveli rises to the right when a combination of "black 7-bell-bell", "white 7-bell-bell" or "watermelon-bell-bell" is available on the winning line LN. Medals will be paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the black 7, white 7, and watermelon of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position one level above the bell, and the bell of the right reel 2R is positioned one level below the replay or plum. Since it is located at the position, if any combination of "black 7-bell-bell", "white 7-bell-bell" and "watermelon-bell-bell" is available, "bell-bell-replay", " The combination of “bell-bell-plum” goes up to the right, that is, it is aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  Further, in the left reel 2L, one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, and in the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, bells are arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, as a general rule, when an upward beveling is won in an internal lottery described later, the player can win the prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The upward-sloping rebebe is awarded when any combination of "bell-bell-orange" and "bell-bell-BAR" is completed on the pay line LN, and 10 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one level above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the right reel 2R are arranged at a position one level below the bell. Therefore, if any combination of “Bell-Bell-Orange” and “Bell-Bell-BAR” is available, the combination of “Replay-Bell-Bell” and “Plum-Bell-Bell” goes up to the right, that is, invalid. It will be aligned with the line LM4.

  Further, the bells are arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, and one of orange and BAR is arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when the player is winning the upward rising rebebe in the internal lottery described below, the player can win the prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the re-game combination of the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the re-gaming combination includes a normal replay, a lower replay, a fall replay, a promotion replay 1, a special replay, and an SP (special) replay.

  The normal replay is won when a combination of "replay-replay-replay", "replay-replay-plum", "plum-replay-replay", and "plum-replay-plum" is available on the pay line LN. Replays and plums are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, with respect to the normal replay, if the player wins, the prize can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The lower replay is "Bell-Orange-Orange", "Bell-Orange-Cherry", "Bell-Orange-Watermelon", "Bell-Orange-Black 7", "Bell-Orange-Net 7" on the winning line LN. "Bell-Orange-White 7", "Bell-BAR-Orange", "Bell-BAR-Cherry", "Bell-BAR-Watermelon", "Bell-BAR-Black 7", "Bell-BAR-Net 7" , When the combination of "Bell-BAR-White 7" is complete, the prize is won.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one level above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged at a position one level above the replay. "Bell-orange-orange", "bell-orange-cherry", "bell-orange-watermelon", "bell-orange-black 7", "bell-orange-net 7", "bell-orange-" "White 7", "Bell-BAR-Orange", "Bell-BAR-Cherry", "Bell-BAR-Watermelon", "Bell-BAR-Black 7", "Bell-BAR-Net 7", "Bell-BAR". -If any combination of "White 7" is available, "Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / Net 7 / White 7", "Replay-Plum-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Chi" Lee / Net 7 / White 7 ”,“ Plum-Replay-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / Net 7 / White 7 ”,“ Plum-Plum-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / The combination of “mesh 7 / white 7” is aligned in the lower stage, that is, the invalid line LM2.

  Further, the bell is arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L, the orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel, and the orange, cherry, watermelon, black 7 and net 7 are arranged on the right reel 2R. , White 7 is arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, when the lower replay is won in the internal lottery described later, in principle, it can be said that the player can win the prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The fall replay is won when the combination of "bell-replay-bell" is completed on the pay line LN.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one level above the replay or plum, and the bell of the right reel 2R is arranged at a position one level below the replay. So, when the combination of "Bell-Replay-Bell" is complete, the combination of "Replay-Replay-Replay", "Replay-Replay-Plum", "Plum-Replay-Replay", and "Plum-Replay-Plum" goes up. That is, they are aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  The left reel 2L has bells arranged within 5 frames, the middle reel has replays arranged within 5 frames, and the right reel 2R has bells arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, when a fall replay is won in an internal lottery described later, the player can win the prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning a fall replay in normal / RT0, it is controlled to RT1.

  The promotion replay 1 is won when the combination of "replay-replay-bell" and "plum-replay-bell" is complete on the pay line LN. One of the replays and plums is placed within 5 frames on the left reel 2L, the replay is placed within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C, and the bell is placed within 5 frames on the right reel 2R. ing. Therefore, in principle, it can be said that the promotion replay 1 can win the prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if the player wins.

  Promotion Replay 2 is when any combination of "Bell-Orange-Replay", "Bell-Orange-Plum", "Bell-BAR-Replay", and "Bell-BAR-Plum" is available on the winning line LN. It will be a prize.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one level above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged at a position one level above the replay. Since the replay and plum of the right reel 2R are arranged one position above the bell, "bell-orange-replay", "bell-orange-plum", "bell-BAR-replay", " When the combination of "Bell-BAR-Plum" is prepared, the combination of "Replay-Replay-Bell" and "Plum-Replay-Bell" is arranged in the lower stage, that is, the ineffective line LM2.

  Further, the bell is arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L, the orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel, and the replay and the plum are arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R. ing. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, when the promotion replay 2 is won in the internal lottery described later, the player can win the prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning the promotion replay (promotion replay 1 or promotion replay 2) in the normal / RT1, the normal / RT0 is controlled. As will be described later, the promotion replay is set so as not to be independently won in the internal lottery in the normal / RT2, the normal / RT3, and the normal / RT4. Further, when the special role and the promotion replay are simultaneously won in the internal lottery in the normal / RT2, the normal / RT3, and the normal / RT4, it is controlled to 1 / RT0 inside or 2RT0 inside. Therefore, in normal / RT2, normal / RT3, and normal / RT4, the promotion replay is not won. As a result, the normal / RT2, normal / RT3, normal / RT4 are not controlled to normal / RT0, and only when normal / RT1 the promotion replay is won, and only normal / RT1 is normal / RT0. It is configured to be controlled by.

  The special replay is won when the combination of "bell-replay-replay" and "bell-replay-plum" is completed on the pay line LN. On the left reel 2L, the bells are arranged within 5 frames, on the middle reel 2C, the replays are arranged within 5 frames, and on the right reel 2R, the replays and one of the plums are arranged within 5 frames. ing. Therefore, as for the special replay, it can be said that, as a general rule, if the player wins, the prize can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning the special replay in the normal / RT1 or the normal / RT3, the normal / RT2 is controlled. Further, after winning the special replay in the normal / RT2, the normal / RT1 is controlled. As will be described later, the special replay is set so as not to be won alone in the internal lottery in the normal / RT1 and the normal / RT4. In addition, when the special combination and the special replay are won at the same time in the internal lottery in the normal / RT1 and the normal / RT4, the internal medium 1 / RT0 or the internal medium 2 / RT0 is controlled at that time. Therefore, no special replay is won in normal / RT1 or normal / RT4. As a result, it is configured so that it is not controlled from normal / RT1, normal / RT4 to normal / RT2, and a special replay prize is awarded only when normal / RT0, normal / RT3, and from normal / RT0, normal / RT3. Only normal / RT2 is configured to be controlled.

  SP replays include "Replay-Orange-Black 7", "Replay-Orange-Net 7", "Replay-Orange-White 7", "Replay-Orange-Plum", "Replay-BAR-Black 7" on the pay line LN. , "Replay-BAR-Net 7", "Replay-BAR-White 7", "Replay-BAR-Plum", "Plum-Orange-Black 7", "Plum-Orange-Net 7", "Plum-Orange" -White 7 "," plum-orange-plum "," plum-BAR-black 7 "," plum-BAR-net 7 "," plum-BAR-white 7 ", or" plum-BAR-plum ". The prize is awarded when the combination of

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L are arranged one position above orange and BAR, and the black 7, net 7, white 7 and plum of the right reel 2R are orange. , Is located one position below the BAR, so it is "orange-orange-orange", "orange-orange-BAR", "orange-BAR-BAR", "BAR-orange-orange", "BAR-orange". The combination of "-BAR" and "BAR-BAR-BAR" goes up to the right, that is, they are aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, replays and plums are arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, black 7, net 7, white 7, Plums are arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, when the SP replay is won in the internal lottery described later, in principle, it can be said that the player can win the prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning the SP replay in the normal / RT2, the normal / RT3 is controlled. As will be described later, the SP replay is set so as not to be independently won in the internal lottery in the normal / RT0, the normal / RT1, and the normal / RT4. Further, when the special combination and the SP replay are simultaneously won in the internal lottery in the normal / RT0, the normal / RT1, and the normal / RT4, the internal middle 1 / RT0 or the internal middle 2 / RT0 is controlled at that time. For this reason, SP replay is not won in normal / RT0, normal / RT1, and normal / RT4. As a result, the normal / RT0, normal / RT1, normal / RT4 are not controlled by the normal / RT3, the SP replay is won only when it is the normal / RT2, and the normal / RT3 is only from the normal / RT2. It is configured to be controlled by. When the special replay is won in the normal / RT3, the normal / RT3 is maintained.

  Next, the transition result will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the transition results are “Replay-Orange-Bell”, “Replay-BAR-Bell”, “Plum-Orange-Bell”, “Plum-BAR-Bell”, and “Replay-Bell-Orange”. , "Replay-Bell-BAR", "Plum-Bell-Orange", "Plum-Bell-BAR", "Black 7-Orange-Orange", "Black 7-Orange-BAR", "Black 7-BAR-" "Orange", "Black 7-BAR-BAR", "White 7-Orange-Orange", "White 7-Orange-BAR", "White 7-BAR-Orange", "White 7-BAR-BAR", "Watermelon" -Orange-Orange "," Watermelon-Orange-BAR "," Watermelon-BAR-Orange "," Watermelon-BAR-BAR "are 20 kinds of combinations. In this embodiment, the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4 and the right bells 1 to 4 which will be described later are won and the reels other than the reels which are the winning conditions of the middle bell are the first stop and the upper row which is won. When the bell is dropped, the above-mentioned transition result is aligned with the pay line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after the transition results are aligned with the winning line LN in the normal / RT0, the normal / RT2, the normal / RT3, and the normal / RT4, the normal / RT1 is controlled. In addition, in the normal / RT1, when the transition results are aligned with the pay line LN, the normal / RT1 is maintained.

  Next, a combination of lottery target combinations read as lottery target combinations for each game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is a normal gaming state, an internal medium 1 (a state in which BB is elected), an internal medium 2 (a state in which RB is elected), or BB ( The winning combination and the winning probability of the internal lottery differ depending on whether it is RB) or RB. Further, if the game state is the normal game state, at least one of the re-game combination to be targeted for the internal lottery and its winning probability is different depending on the types of RT0 to RT4. As will be described later, as a lottery target combination, a plurality of winning combinations can be simultaneously read and a winning combination can be won. By writing "+" between the winning combinations, it is indicated that the winning combination is simultaneously read in the internal lottery.

  When it is normal / RT0, BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle cherry, BB + 1card role, BB + normal replay, BB + progress replay, BB + promotion replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP. Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 piece, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, single-card, replay GR11, replay GR12, replay GR13, replay GR14 , Replay GR15, Replay GR16, Replay GR21, Replay GR22, Replay GR23, Rep Lee GR24, becomes replay GR25 is the subject role of internal lottery.

  The weak watermelon is an upper-stage watermelon + a right-downward watermelon. That is, when the upper watermelon wins, it can be recognized that it is a weak watermelon. A strong watermelon is a middle watermelon + a waterfall that descends to the right. That is, when the middle watermelon wins, it can be recognized as a strong watermelon. Weak cherries are lower cherries alone, and strong cherries are lower cherries + 1 coin. In the weak cherry, the combination of "BAR-BAR-BAR" in the middle row can be recognized as the weak cherry, while the cherry stops in the lower row of the left reel 2L and the "BAR-BAR-BAR" in the middle row. It is possible to recognize that it is a strong cherry by having a combination of "-BAR".

  The promotion replay is promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2. The bell is the middle bell + the right downward bell. The left bell 1 is the right-down bell + the upper bell 5 + the upper bell 8, the left bell 2 is the right-down bell + the upper bell 6 + the upper bell 7, and the left bell 3 is the right-down bell + the upper bell. 2 + upper bell 3 and the left bell 4 are right descending bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4. The left bells 1 to 4 are also simply called left bells. Middle bell 1 is middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 5, middle bell 2 is middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 6, middle bell 3 is middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 7 and the middle bell 4 is middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 8. The middle bells 1 to 4 are also simply referred to as middle bells. The right bell 1 is the middle bell + the upper bell 3 + the upper bell 5, the right bell 2 is the middle bell + the upper bell 1 + the upper bell 7, and the right bell 3 is the middle bell + the upper bell 4 + the upper bell. 6 and the right bell 4 is middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 8. The right bells 1 to 4 are also simply called right bells. The left bells 1-4, the middle bells 1-4, and the right bells 1-4 are also simply referred to as push-order bells.

  Replay GR11 is Fall Replay + Promotion Replay 2, Replay GR12 is Fall Replay + Promotion Replay 2 + Normal Replay, Replay GR13 is Fall Replay + Promotion Replay 1, and Replay GR14 Fall Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Normal Replay, Replay GR15 is Fall Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2, and Replay GR16 is Fall Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2 + Normal Replay.

  Replay GR21 is a fall replay + special replay, replay GR22 is a fall replay + special replay + normal replay, replay GR23 is a fall replay + special replay + lower replay, and replay GR24 is Fall replay + special replay + normal replay + lower replay, and replay GR25 is fall replay + special replay + promotion replay 1.

  When it is normal / RT1, BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle cherry, BB + 1card role, BB + normal replay, BB + fall replay, BB + promotion replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP. Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 piece, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle Bell 4, Right Bell 1, Right Bell 2, Right Bell 3, Right Bell 3, Right Bell 4, Weak Watermelon, Strong Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, 1 piece, Normal Replay, Replay GR1, Replay GR2, Replay GR3 , Replay GR4, Replay GR5, and Replay GR6 are targets for the internal lottery.

  Replay GR1 is normal replay + promotion replay 1, replay GR2 is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2, replay GR3 is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + lower replay, and replay GR4 Is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2 + lower replay, replay GR5 is normal replay + promotion replay 2, and replay GR6 is normal replay + promotion replay 2 + lower replay.

  When normal / RT2, BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle cherry, BB + 1card role, BB + normal replay, BB + fall replay, BB + promotion replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 piece, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle Bell 4, Right Bell 1, Right Bell 2, Right Bell 3, Right Bell 4, Weak Watermelon, Strong Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, Single Role, Normal Replay, Replay GR31, Replay GR32, Replay GR33 , Replay GR34, Replay GR35, and Replay GR36 are targets for the internal lottery.

  Replay GR31 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay, replay GR32 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay + fall replay, replay GR33 is special replay + SP replay + lower replay, replay GR34. Is a special replay + SP replay + lower replay + fall replay, replay GR35 is a special replay + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay, and replay GR36 is a special replay + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay + It is a fall replay.

  When it is normal / RT3, BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle cherry, BB + 1card role, BB + normal replay, BB + progress replay, BB + promotion replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP. Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 piece, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, single-card, replay GR31, replay GR32, replay GR33, replay GR34 , Replay GR35, Replay GR36, and SP Replay are targets for the internal lottery.

  When it is normal / RT4, BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle cherry, BB + 1card role, BB + normal replay, BB + progress replay, BB + promotion replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP. Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 piece, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle-tier cherry, single-card role, normal replay are targets for the internal lottery.

  When inside 1 / RT0 and inside 2 / RT0, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right Bell 1, Right Bell 2, Right Bell 3, Right Bell 4, Weak Watermelon, Strong Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, Single Cherry, Single Replay, Lower Replay, SP Replay, Fall Replay, Promotion Replay, Special Replay will be the target of the internal lottery.

  When it is BB (RB) / RT0, weak cherry and all the roles are targets of internal lottery. When it is RB / RT0, all the roles, RB bell 1, RB bell 2 and RB bell 3 are targets of the internal lottery. Becomes

  All roles are all small roles other than beveling to the right, that is, middle bell + right descending bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + Right-down watermelon + upper-stage watermelon + lower-stage cherry + middle-stage cherry + 1-sheet role + rightward bell + rightward rebebe.

  RB bell 1 is a right-up bell + right-up ribebe, RB bell 2 is a right-up bell + right-up ribebe + right-up beliri, and RB bell 3 is all small roles, that is, a middle bell. + Downward Bell + Upper Bell 1 + Upper Bell 2 + Upper Bell 3 + Upper Bell 4 + Upper Bell 5 + Upper Bell 6 + Upper Bell 7 + Upper Bell 8 + Middle Watermelon + Lowering Watermelon + Upper Watermelon + Lower Cherry + Middle Cherry + Single Layer + Rightward Bell + rising right + rising right.

  Also, in normal / RT0-4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, one piece role, normal replay, fall replay, promotion replay, SP replay that can be simultaneously won with either BB or RB. The number of judgment values of 1 inside RT0 and inside 2 RT0 are read separately from the special role, respectively, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, single-card role, normal replay, and fall. Since it is added to Replay, Promotional Replay, and SP Replay, the winning probabilities of strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle-tiered cherry, single-card role, normal replay, fall replay, promotion replay, and SP replay will be constant. Backed by.

  In this way, the target combination of the internal lottery differs depending on whether the game state is the normal game state, the inside 1, 2, the BB (RB), or the RB, and the BB (RB) In RB, internal lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning probability of the small winning combination is set higher than in the normal gaming state and inside.

  In addition, when the game state is 1 or 2 inside, the target combination of the internal lottery does not change depending on whether it is 1 or 2 inside, but it is 1 or inside. The internal lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning probability of the target re-game combination differs depending on whether the number is 2.

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the re-play combination subject to the internal lottery differs depending on which of RT0 to 4 and the target depending on which of RT0 to 4 The internal lottery is carried out by using the re-game combination and the lottery tables having different winning probabilities.

  As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of types of small wins (bells) and a plurality of types of re-playing roles are simultaneously elected, the type and stop of the winning small win or re-playing role. A control is performed in which the symbol combination of the small winning combination and the symbol combination of the re-playing combination, which are determined according to the pressing order of the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, are aligned with the winning line LN within the pull-in range of a maximum of four frames and stopped. Therefore, the types of small winning combinations and re-playing combinations that are simultaneously won will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17. FIG. 15 shows a list of small winning combinations and re-playing combinations that are simultaneously won. 16 shows reel control when a plurality of replays are simultaneously won, and FIG. 17 shows reel control when a plurality of small wins are simultaneously won.

  As shown in FIG. 16, when the replay GR1 (normal replay + promotion replay 1) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left middle right, the combination of promotion replay 1 of the replayed winning combination is won. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left center-right direction, the control is performed so that the normal replay combination is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR2 (Normal Replay + Promotional Replay 1 + Promotional Replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the right and left middle order, the combination of Promotional Replay 1 among the winning replay roles is aligned with the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than right and left, the normal replay combination is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR3 (Normal Replay + Promotional Replay 1 + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle, left, or right order, the combination of Promotional Replay 1 among the winning re-game actors will be stopped on the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle, left, and right directions, the normal replay combination is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR4 (Normal Replay + Promoted Replay 1 + Promoted Replay 2 + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right, left and left, the combination of Promoted Replay 1 among the winning re-game roles will be on the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle right and left, the control for aligning the normal replay combination with the pay line LN and performing the stop is performed.

  When the replay GR5 (normal replay + promoted replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the right, left and middle order, the combination of the promoted replay 2 among the winning re-game roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than right, left, and middle, the control is performed such that the normal replay combination is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR6 (Normal Replay + Promotional Replay 2 + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle and left, align the combination of Promotional Replay 2 among the winning re-game actors to the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than right-middle-left, the control for stopping is performed by aligning the combination of normal replays with the pay line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2, and the normal replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, and therefore stop. Depending on the operation order, the reel control is performed so that the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2 or the normal replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation modes for winning the promotion replays 1 and 2 with the replays GR1 to GR6.

  For this reason, in the normal / RT1 in which the replays GR1 to 6 are the targets of the internal lottery, if any of the replays GR1 to 6 is elected, the promotion replay is won with a probability of 1/6, and the normal / RT0 is set. It will be moved.

  If the replay GR11 (falling replay + promotion replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left middle right, the combination of the promotion replay 2 among the winning re-game roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left, middle, and right, the control is performed such that the combination of the fall replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR12 (Fall Replay + Promotion Replay 2 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the right and left middle order, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 among the winning re-game roles will be stopped on the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than right and left, the combination of the fall replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the replay GR13 (falling replay + promotion replay 1) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle, left and right order, the combination of the promotion replay 1 of the replayed winning combination is stopped to be aligned with the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle left and right, the control is performed so that the combination of the fall replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When Replay GR14 (Fall Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of promotion Replay 1 among the winning re-game actors is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle right and left, the combination of the fall replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR15 (Fall Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left middle, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 among the winning re-game actors is aligned with the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in a sequence other than right and left, the combination of the fall replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR16 (Fall Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle and left, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 among the winning re-game characters is the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than right, middle and left, the combination of the falling replays is aligned and stopped on the pay line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2, and the falling replay are stopped at intervals of 5 frames or less on all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, and thus stop. According to the operation order, the reel control is performed so that the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2 or the falling replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation modes for the replays GR11 to 16 in order to win the promotion replays 1 and 2 and to avoid the fall replay.

  Therefore, in the normal / RT0 in which the replays GR11 to 16 are the targets of the internal lottery, if any of the replays GR11 to 16 is won, the promotion replay is won with a probability of 1/6 and the normal / RT0 is maintained. On the other hand, with a probability of 5/6, the fall replay will win and it will shift to normal / RT1.

  When the replay GR21 (falling replay + special replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle and right, the control of stopping the special replay combination of the replayed winning combination aligned with the pay line LN If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left-middle-right order, the control is performed such that the combination of the fall replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the replay GR22 (falling replay + special replay + normal replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the right and left middle order, the special replay combination of the replayed winning combination is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than right and left, the control is performed such that the combination of the fall replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the replay GR23 (fall replay + special replay + lower replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle, left, and right order, the special replay combination of the replayed winning combination is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the center left and right, the combination of the fall replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR24 (Fall Replay + Special Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, align the special replay combination among the winning re-game roles on the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle right and left, the combination of the fall replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR25 (Fall Replay + Special Replay + Promotion Replay 1) is won and the right operation is performed, that is, if the stop operation is performed in the operation mode of first stopping the right reel 2R, the special replay among the replayed roles In the case where the stop operation is performed in a manner that the combination of the above is aligned with the pay line LN and is stopped, and is left-pressed, that is, the left reel 2L is first stopped or middle pressed, that is, the middle reel 2C is first stopped. In order to control, the combination of the falling replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 3, since the symbols constituting the special replay and the falling replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less in all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, according to the stop operation order, Regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, the reel control is performed so that the special replay or the fall replay always wins.

  In this way, different operation modes are set for the replays GR21 to 25 in order to win the special replay and avoid the fall replay.

  Therefore, in the normal / RT0 in which the replays GR21 to 25 are the targets of the internal lottery, if any of the replays GR21 to 25 is won, the special replay wins with a probability of 1/5 and shifts to the normal / RT2. On the other hand, there is a 4/5 chance that the fall replay will win and the game will move to normal / RT1.

  When the replay GR31 (special replay + SP replay + normal replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left middle right, the combination of SP replays among the winning re-game actors is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the winning re-play combinations is aligned with the winning line LN and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle button or the right button. When it is made, the combination of the special replays is aligned with the pay line LN and the stop is controlled.

  If Replay GR32 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Normal Replay + Fall Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of SP Replay among the winning re-game actors will be aligned on the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle and right, the combination of the normal replays among the winning re-play combinations is aligned with the pay line LN and the stop is performed. When the stop operation is performed, the control for stopping the special replay combination is aligned with the pay line LN.

  When the replay GR33 (special replay + SP replay + lower stage replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle left and right order, the control for stopping the SP replay combination of the replayed winning combination aligned with the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the winning re-play combinations is aligned with the winning line LN and the stop operation is performed by pressing the left or the right. When it is made, the combination of the special replays is aligned with the pay line LN and the stop is controlled.

  If Replay GR34 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Lower Replay + Fall Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right, left, align the combination of SP Replay among the winning re-game actors to the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in the order of middle, left and right, the combination of the normal replays among the winning re-play combinations is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed, the control for stopping the special replay combination is aligned with the pay line LN.

  If Replay GR35 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle left, right, the combination of SP Replay among the winning re-game actors is aligned with the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left, the combination of the normal replays of the winning re-play combination is controlled to be aligned with the pay line LN and stopped by pressing the left or the middle. When the stop operation is performed, the control for stopping the special replay combination is aligned with the pay line LN.

  If Replay GR36 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay + Fall Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle and left, the combination of SP Replay among the winning re-play roles will be the winning line. When the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left in the order of being aligned with LN, and the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, the control of aligning and stopping the combination of the normal replays of the winning re-game combination with the pay line LN is performed, and the left push Alternatively, when the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle button, the combination of the special replays is aligned with the pay line LN and the stop control is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the SP replay, the special replay, and the normal replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less in all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Accordingly, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, the reel control is performed so that the SP replay, the special replay, or the normal replay always wins.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation modes for winning the SP replays with the replays GR31 to 36, and different operation modes for winning the SP replays or the normal replays and avoiding the special replays. The mode is set.

  Therefore, in the normal / RT2 in which the replays GR31 to 36 are the targets of the internal lottery, if any of the replays GR31 to 36 is elected, SP replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and shifts to the normal / RT3. On the other hand, a normal replay or a special replay will be won with a probability of 5/6 and the normal / RT2 will be maintained. Also, as will be described later, if SP Replay wins, one or more navigation stocks that are advantageous to the player will always be given, so in normal / RT2, if any of Replay GR31 to 36 is elected. With a probability of 1/6, SP replay wins and one or more navistocks are given, and it is easy to win SP replays, that is, it is possible to shift to normal / RT3 where navistock is likely to be given.

  In addition, in normal / RT3 where Replay GR31-36 is the target of the internal lottery, if any of Replay GR31-36 wins, SP Replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and there is one navigation stock to be described later. While being awarded as described above, the normal replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and the normal / RT3 is maintained, and the special replay wins with a probability of 4/6 and shifts to the normal / RT2.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the left bell 1 (downward bell + upper bell 5 + upper bell 8) is won and the stop operation is performed by pushing the left button, the combination of rightward bells among the winning small wins is selected. When the stop control is performed by aligning with the pay line LN, and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle button or the right button, any combination of the upper bell 5, the upper bell 8 or the transition result is aligned with the win line LN and stopped. Control.

  When the left bell 2 (downward bell + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7) is won and the stop operation is performed by pushing left, the combination of the rightward bells of the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle button or the right button, the combination of any one of the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, and the transition result is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the left bell 3 (downward bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3) is won and the stop operation is performed by pressing left, the combination of the rightward bells of the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle button or the right button, the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, or any combination of the transition numbers is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When the left bell 4 (downward bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4) is won and the stop operation is performed by pushing left, the combination of the rightward bell among the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle button or the right button, the control is performed such that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 4 or the transition result is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the composition pattern of the bell descending to the right is arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the left bells 1 to 4 are won, the stop operation is performed by pushing the left button. In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the right downward bell is always aligned with the pay line LN, while the symbols forming the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Even if the left bells 1 to 4 are won, if there is a stop operation by pressing the middle button or right button, it will be within the drawing range of the winning design of the upper bells 1 to 8 If the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, the winning upper stage bell cannot be aligned with the pay line LN. In that case, the transition result is controlled to be aligned with the pay line LN.

  When the middle bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 5) is won and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle button, the combination of the middle bells of the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the left or right buttons, the combination of any one of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 5, and the transition score is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the middle bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 6) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle button, the combination of the middle bell of the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If the stop operation is performed by pressing the left or right buttons, the upper bell 1, the upper bell 6, or a combination of any of the transition results is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the middle bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 7) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle button, the combination of the middle bells of the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If the stop operation is performed by pressing the left or right buttons, the upper bell 4, the upper bell 7, or any combination of the transition outcomes is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the middle bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle button, the combination of the middle bell of the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button or the right button, the combination of any of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 8 or the transition result is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the configuration pattern of the middle bell is arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the middle bells 1 to 4 are won, when the stop operation is performed by the middle push Is always controlled to align the middle stage bell with the pay line LN regardless of the timing of the stop operation, while the symbols constituting the upper stage bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Because there are places, even if the middle bells 1 to 4 are elected, if the stop operation is performed by pushing left or right, it is appropriate to be the pull-in range of the design pattern of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 If the stop operation is not performed at the timing, the winning upper bell cannot be aligned with the pay line LN, and in that case, the transition result is controlled to be aligned with the pay line LN.

  When the right bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 1 upper bell 7) is won and the stop operation is performed by pushing the right button, the combination of the middle bells of the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button or the middle button, control is performed to align any one of the upper bell 1, the upper bell 7 or the transition result with the pay line LN and stop the combination.

  When the right bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 5) is won and the stop operation is performed by pushing the right button, the combination of the middle bell of the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button or the middle button, control is performed to align any one of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 5 or the transition result with the pay line LN and stop the operation.

  When the right bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 6) is won and the stop operation is performed by pushing the right button, the combination of the middle bell of the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button or the middle button, the upper bell 4, the upper bell 6, or any combination of the transition numbers is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the right bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 8) is won and the stop operation is performed by pushing the right button, the combination of the middle bell of the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button or the middle button, control is performed to align any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 8 or the transition score with the pay line LN and stop the operation.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the configuration of the middle bell is arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the right bells 1 to 4 are won, when the stop operation is performed by pushing the right button. On the other hand, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the middle bell is always aligned with the pay line LN, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Because there is a place, even if the right bell 1 to 4 is elected, if the stop operation is performed by pressing the left or the middle, it is appropriate to be the pull-in range of the design pattern of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 If the stop operation is not performed at the timing, the winning upper bell cannot be aligned with the pay line LN, and in that case, the transition result is controlled to be aligned with the pay line LN.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when any one of the left bell, the middle bell, the right bell, that is, the pushing order bell is won, the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination. While the right-lowering bell or the middle bell always wins, by performing the stop operation in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode depending on the type of winning combination, the upper bells are aligned in 1/4, but 3/4 Therefore, the upper bells may not be aligned and the transition items may be aligned.

  Therefore, when the push order bell is elected, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the operation is performed in a specific operation mode according to the type of the winning combination. In other words, even if one of the push-order bells wins, it is not possible to intentionally select a specific operation mode without knowing the type of the push-order bell. Although the medals can be surely won by winning the prize, the upper bell can be won only by 1/4 at a ratio of 2/3, and the medals cannot be surely won.

  When RB Bell 1 (right rising bell + right rising rebebe) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pushing left, the combination of the right rising bells among the winning small wins is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle button or the right button, the combination of the upward rising rebebe is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  If RB Bell 2 (Right Up Bell + Right Up Rivebe + Right Up Beriri) is won and you press the middle key to stop, the combination of Right Up Bell among the winning small wins will be aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the combination of beveling to the right is aligned to the winning line LN and the stop operation is performed. When the stopping operation is performed by pushing the right button, the right rising rebebe The combination is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  RB bell 3 (middle bell + right downward bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + right downward watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle cherry (+1 card combination + right rising bell + right rising Bebery + right rising Ribebe) is selected, and when the stop operation is performed by pressing the right, the combination of right rising bells among the winning small roles is aligned on the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed by pressing left or middle, the combination of upward rising Beveli is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the upward-sloping bell, the upward-slope rebebe, and the upward-sloping beveli are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when RB bells 1 to 4 are won, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, any combination of upward-sloping bell, upward-sloping rebebe, and upward-slope bebery will be paid out on the pay line LN, and 10 medals will be paid out, but at a rate of 1/3. Only, the combination of "bell-bell-bell" will be aligned to the right.

  Further, although not particularly shown, when a bell (middle bell + right downward bell) is won, a combination of "bell-bell-bell" is aligned on the pay line LN regardless of the reel stop order and operation timing. To be controlled.

  Also, all roles (middle bell + right downward bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + right downward watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle) (Cherry + 1 hand + right rising bell + right rising Ribebe) is controlled so that the combination of "bell-bell-bell" is aligned upwards regardless of the reel stop order and operation timing. It

[Game flow]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the present embodiment, it is controlled to any one of the normal game state, inside 1, inside 2, RB, and BB (RB), and in the normal game state, any of RT0 to 4 Controlled by

  As described above, the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is allocated with an area for storing a game state flag that can specify the game state and an area for storing an RT flag that can specify the type of RT. There is.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the lottery table in which the number of determination values of the target winning combination is determined, the lottery table for inside 1 is a lottery table for inside 2, the lottery table for RB, and the lottery table for BB (RB). It has a lottery table and a lottery table for the normal gaming state, respectively. Furthermore, as the lottery table for the normal gaming state, a lottery table for RT0, a lottery table for RT1, a lottery table for RT2, and a lottery table for RT3. , And RT4 lottery tables.

  Then, in the internal lottery process, the gaming state and the type of RT are specified by referring to the value of the gaming state flag and the value of the RT flag stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the lottery table is selected accordingly. By performing a lottery using the selected lottery table, a lottery target winning combination corresponding to the gaming state and the type of RT is drawn with a winning probability according to the gaming state and the type of RT.

  Specifically, referring to the value of the game state flag stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, whether the current game state is in BB (RB), whether in RB, whether in 1 inside, It is determined whether or not it is 2 in the inside, and if the current game state is BB (RB), it is for BB (RB) in which the target combination of the internal lottery in BB (RB) and the number of its determination values are stored. The lottery table is selected to perform the lottery, and if the RB is in the RB, the lottery table for the RB in which the target combination of the internal lottery in the RB and the number of judgment values thereof are stored is selected to perform the lottery. If so, the lottery table for the inside medium 1 in which the target combination of the internal lottery 1 and the number of judgment values thereof are stored is selected, and if the inside medium 2 is selected, the internal lottery in the inside medium 2 is performed. Inside the target role and the number of judgment values If the current gaming state is neither in BB (RB) nor in RB, and is not 1 or 2 inside, that is, in the normal gaming state, the RAM 41c is further stored in the RAM 41c. The value of the stored RT flag is referred to, and a normal lottery table in which the target combination of the internal lottery and the number of judgment values thereof are stored is selected according to the type of RT specified from the value, and the lottery is performed. Thus, the lottery for the target combination corresponding to each gaming state and the type of RT is performed with the winning probability according to each gaming state and the type of RT.

  Normal / RT0 is normal / RT1 or normal / RT2 when the promotion replay wins in normal / RT1 (when one of the replays GR1 to 6 is won and the stop operation is performed in the order in which the promotion replay wins). Moves when it is finished by exhausting the specified number of games. Regardless of the number of games after the transition to normal / RT0, the normal / RT0 shifts to normal / RT1 due to the winning of the fall replay or the stop of the transition result, or to the normal / RT2 due to the winning of the special replay. It ends by either moving or moving to Internal Medium 1 or Internal Medium 2 by winning the special role.

  Normal / RT1 shifts when Normal / RT0, Normal / RT2, Normal / RT3, Normal / RT4 stops rolling, Normal / RT0 falls replay, Normal / RT2 special replay wins To do. Then, in the normal / RT1, the number of remaining RT games is subtracted for each game, and the remaining number of RT games becomes 0 after the prescribed number of games (1000G in the present embodiment) is exhausted. It ends by moving to normal / RT0 or moving to Internal Medium 1 or Internal Medium 2 by winning a special combination.

  Normal / RT2 shifts when a special replay is won in normal / RT0 or normal / RT3. Then, in the normal / RT2, the number of remaining RT games is subtracted for each game, and the number of remaining RT games becomes 0 after the prescribed number of games (30 G in the present embodiment) is exhausted. Move to normal / RT0, move to normal / RT3 with SP replay winning, move to normal / RT1 when the transition result stops, move to normal / RT1, or win a special role to get inside 1 or inside 2 It ends by moving to.

  Normal / RT3 shifts when SP Replay wins in normal / RT2. Then, in normal / RT3, regardless of the number of games after the transition to normal / RT3, whether the special replay wins and shifts to normal / RT2, or whether the transition result stops and shifts to normal / RT1 , And ends when the special character is elected and moves to Internal Medium 1 or Internal Medium 2.

  Normal / RT4 shifts at the end of BB (RB) and RB. Regardless of the number of games that have been transferred to normal / RT4, the normal / RT4 will stop at the transition and move to RT1, or the special role will be elected to move to internal middle 1 or internal middle 2 It ends by doing.

  Inside 1 shifts when BB of special roles is won in the normal game state. Then, the internal middle 1 ends when the special part that has triggered the transition to the internal middle 1 wins and moves to BB (RB) or RB regardless of the number of games after the internal middle 1 is transferred. ..

  Inside 2 shifts when the RB of the special combination wins in the normal game state. Then, the inside middle 2 ends when the special part that has triggered the shift to the inside middle 2 wins and shifts to BB (RB) or RB regardless of the number of games after the inside middle 2 ..

  The RB shifts when the RB wins in 1 or 2 of the inside. Then, the RB ends when 12 games are exhausted or 6 times are won.

  BB (RB) shifts when BB wins inside. Then, the BB (RB) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the BB (RB) exceeds the specified number, regardless of the number of games since the transition to the BB (RB).

  Further, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, when the sub-control unit 91 wins the navigation target winning combination, it is possible to execute the navigation effect of notifying the information capable of specifying the pushing order for winning the navigation target winning combination. The effect state can be controlled during the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) which is the notification period.

  Here, the gaming state and the transition status of the RT according to the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, when RB or BB (RB) is completed, the normal / RT4 transition is performed.

  In the normal / RT4, when the transition result is stopped, the process shifts to RT1 and the special combination is elected, so that the internal medium 1 or the internal medium 2 is transferred depending on the type of the special character that has been elected.

  In normal / RT4, if any of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 are won, and the small win cannot be won, the transition result will be stopped. For this reason, in the normal / RT4 that has moved after the end of the RB or BB (RB), any one of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 can be won, and the small win can be won. If there is not, the routine will shift to normal / RT1.

  In normal / RT1, you won't win a special role, you won the specified number of games (1000G) without winning a promotion replay, or you move to normal / RT0 when you get a promotion replay, and a special role wins. , In the inside 1 or in the inside 2 depending on the type of the winning special role.

  Normal ・ In RT1, Replay GR1-6 wins, and the correct replay order in the stop order results in the promotion replay. Therefore, in RT1, Replay GR1-6 wins and corrects the stop order. It will move to RT0.

  In Normal / RT0, if a falling replay wins or the transition is stopped, it shifts to Normal / RT1, and if a special replay wins, it shifts to Normal / RT2 and the special role wins. Depending on the type of special role played, it moves to 1 in the inside or 2 in the inside.

  In normal / RT0, the replays GR11 to 16 are elected, and if the stop order is correct, the promotion replay wins. If the answer is incorrect, the fall replay wins. In addition, in normal / RT0, the replays GR21 to 25 are elected, the special replay is won when the stop order is correct, and the fall replay is won when the answer is incorrect. In addition, in normal / RT0, when any of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 is won and the small winning combination cannot be won, the transition result is stopped. Therefore, in normal / RT0, the replay GR21 to 25 wins, and the stop order is correct, and the game shifts to normal / RT2, and the replay GR11 to 16 wins and the stop order becomes incorrect, or the left bell 1 -4, middle bells 1 to 4, right bells 1 to 4 are elected, and if the small winning combination cannot be won, the process shifts to normal / RT1.

  In normal / RT2, you won't win a special role, you won't win SP replays, and you moved to normal / RT0 by consuming the specified number of games (30G). If you received SP replays, you moved to normal / RT3. When the special role is won, the state shifts to Internal Medium 1 or Internal Medium 2 depending on the type of the winning special role.

  In normal / RT2, Replay GR31-36 wins, and SP Replay wins when the stop order is correct. In addition, in the normal / RT2, when one of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 is won and the small winning combination cannot be won, the transition result is stopped. Therefore, in normal / RT2, replay GR31-36 wins, and if the stop order is correct, it shifts to normal / RT3 and either left bell 1-4, middle bell 1-4, or right bell 1-4. Will be elected and if it is not possible to win the small role, the routine will shift to normal / RT1.

  In normal / RT3, the special replay wins to move to RT2, and when the transition result stops, it shifts to normal / RT1 and the special role wins, depending on the type of special role won. Move to Medium 1 or Internal Medium 2.

  In the normal / RT3, the replays GR31 to 36 are elected, the SP replay or the normal replay wins when the stop order is correct, and the special replay wins when the answer is incorrect. Further, in the normal / RT3, when any one of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 is elected and the small win cannot be won, the transition result is stopped. Therefore, in the normal / RT3, the replay GR31 to 36 wins, and the stop order becomes incorrect, and the process shifts to the normal / RT2, and the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, and the right bell 1 to 4 are selected. If any one of them wins and cannot win the small winning combination, the routine will shift to normal / RT1.

  In the inside 1 and 2, the special role that has triggered the transition to the inside is won, and the player moves to RB or BB (RB).

[Regarding production control of sub-control unit]
Next, the control of the production performed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the production control board 90 will be described.

  The sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process when receiving a command from the main control unit 41. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The reception buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be stored.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub control unit 91 is the earliest. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the step, and the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like are referred to based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. Performs output control of various performance devices.

  In the control pattern table, for each of a plurality of types of effect patterns, a display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, a lighting mode of the effect effect LED 52, an output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, a lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub control unit 91 receives a command, the sub control unit 91 selects the control pattern corresponding to the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Of these, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the effect device is performed based on the control pattern. As a result, an effect corresponding to the effect pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If a new command is received during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and changes to the newly received command. The effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. That is, even if the effect is not completed to the end, if a new command is received, the effect that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is a command that triggers a new effect. The effect based on the command will be executed.

  When the winning number command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the winning number command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub control unit 91 receives the winning number command, the sub control unit 91 displays the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the winning number command. By referring to the registered selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selected rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Therefore, even if the same command is received, different control patterns are selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the winning number command is received, and as a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  Next, various control contents executed by the sub control unit 91 in the present embodiment will be described below.

[Startup (sub)]
First, the control content of the activation process (sub) executed by the sub control unit 91 in the present embodiment will be described based on FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the system reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95, the sub control unit 91 performs a startup process (sub).

  First, the sub-control unit 91 initializes internal devices, peripheral ICs, interrupt modes, stack pointers, etc. (Sn1), and then permits access to the RAM 91c (Sn2). Next, the mains includes the power failure recovery command 1, the power failure recovery command 2, the power failure recovery command 3, the power failure recovery command 4, and the hot start command generated in Sa12 to Sa16 of the startup processing (main) of FIGS. 5 and 6. It is determined whether it is received from the control unit 41 (Sn3). If these commands have not been received, it is determined whether or not the setting change start command generated in Sa16 of the activation process (main) of FIGS. 5 and 6 has been received from the main control unit 41 (Sn4). .. When the setting change start command is received, the setting change start command flag indicating that the setting change start command is received is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 91c (Sn5).

  Whether the RAM 91c has backup data when the power failure recovery command 1, power failure recovery command 2, power failure recovery command 3, power failure recovery command 4, hot start command and setting change start command are received. It is determined whether or not. Whether or not there is backup data in the RAM 91c is confirmed, for example, by whether or not there is a backup flag set in the RAM 91c in the power interruption process described later (Sn6). If the backup flag is not set in step Sn6, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sn13). On the other hand, if it is determined in Sn6 that the backup flag is set, the data in the RAM is normal, so the backup flag is cleared (Sn7).

  When the backup flag is cleared in the step of Sn7, the RAM parities of all storage areas of the RAM 91c are calculated (Sn8). In step Sn9, it is determined whether the RAM parity calculated in step Sn8 is 0 or not. If the RAM parity is not 0 in step Sn9, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sn13).

  If the RAM parity is 0 in the step of Sn9, it is determined whether or not the setting change command reception flag is stored in the RAM 91c (Sn10).

  When the setting change start command reception flag is stored in the RAM 91c, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sn13). When the setting change start command reception flag is not stored in the RAM 91c, the restoration process is executed based on the backed up data (Sn11). Then, the sub control unit 91 described in FIG. 33 permits the interrupt of the timer interrupt process (sub) executed at a constant interval (interval of 1.12 ms), and executes the timer interrupt process according to the timer interrupt. To do. If it is determined in step Sn4 that the setting change start command has not been received, has the error start command generated in Sa22 of the startup process (main) of FIG. 5 been received from the main control unit 41? It is determined whether or not (Sn14). If it is determined that the error start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sn15 to initialize the RAM 91c, and error processing is performed (Sn16). In the error processing, an error notification is given, and when the error state is released by, for example, operating the reset / setting switch 38 by a game shop clerk, the error notification ends and the original state is restored. When it is determined that the error start command is not received, that is, when the setting change start command, the return command, and the error start command are not received, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sn13). Then, the sub-control unit 91 described in FIG. 19 permits the interrupt of the timer interrupt process (sub) executed at regular intervals (interval of 1.12 ms), and executes the timer interrupt process according to the timer interrupt. To do.

[Timer interrupt processing (sub)]
Next, a timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the sub control unit 91 (CPU 91c) at an interval of 1.12 seconds based on the count value of the internal clock will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub control unit 91 first saves the register in use to the stack area (Sp1). Next, a power failure determination process is performed (Sp2). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 48. If the voltage drop signal is input, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal was also input in the previous power failure determination process. It is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal has been input in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that there is a power failure, and the power failure flag indicating that effect is set.

  After the power failure determination process in step Sp2, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is set (Sp3), and when the power interruption flag is set, the process proceeds to the power interruption process (sub). In the power interruption process (sub), the backup flag used in the determination of Sn6 of the startup process (sub) shown in FIG. 14 is set after the backup data is created, or used in the determination of Sn9 of the startup process (sub) shown in FIG. The checksum is calculated by calculating the exclusive OR of the backup data.

  If the power failure flag is not set, command analysis processing is executed (Sp4). In the command analysis processing, it is determined whether or not the command is stored in the command buffer, and if the command is stored in the command buffer, the command is acquired from the command buffer. Then, the processing according to the acquired command is executed.

  Next, the sub-control unit 91 determines the number of medals given to the player by paying out medals from the number of medals used by the player in the AT (assist time) when the navigation effect is executed when the winning combination of the navigation target is won. A net increase count process of counting the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of sheets is executed (Sp5). In the navigation effect, the player is informed of the operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous.

  Next, the sub control unit 91 performs a notification effect of notifying that the number of medals acquired by the player when the payout of medals occurs during AT or the net increase in AT has reached a specified number. Execution processing is executed (Sp6).

  In addition to the above, when the AT (assist time) lottery condition is satisfied (when winning the cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle-tier cherry) or SP replay that is a lottery target of the internal lottery) Perform AT lottery. In the AT lottery, it is determined whether or not to add the number of navigation stocks. Then, when it is decided to add the navigation stock, it is also determined how many navigation stocks should be added. The number of navistock indicates the period during which the AT can control.

  In the ART (AT in RT0, RT2, RT3), the winning probability of the target winning combination for navigation is set so that the average net increase in medals per game is two by executing the navigation effect. Therefore, in ART, the expected value of the number of medals given to the player with respect to the number of medals used by the player becomes 2 or more, and the number of medals given to the player may be larger. On the other hand, in RT1 or RT4 in a state not controlled by AT, that is, in the normal game state, by not executing the navigation effect, the winning probability of the winning combination is set so that the average net increase in medals per game is less than 0. It is set. Therefore, in the normal game state, the expected value of the number of medals given to the player with respect to the number of medals used by the player becomes less than 0, and the number of medals used by the player may increase. In the following, ART may be simply referred to as AT.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the AT lottery is higher than that when the AT lottery is performed at another opportunity until 50 games have passed after the AT is finished (after the AT is finished when the navigation stock becomes 0). (That is, the navigation stock addition probability) is set to a high probability. Therefore, the AT pull-back zone is set up to 50 games after the AT is over, and it can be expected that the AT is extended by the pull-back of the AT. It should be noted that it is not necessary to change the winning probability of the AT lottery as in the present embodiment, and even when there is a change, the timing and period can be set appropriately.

  When one or more navigation stock numbers are determined in the AT lottery, the sub control unit 91 stores an AT flag indicating the AT and the navigation stock number in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. Based on the AT flag of the RAM 91c, the sub control unit 91 specifies whether or not to control the AT and also specifies the number of remaining navigation stocks. When the AT flag indicating the AT is set, the navigation stock number is consumed by 1 and the AT can be controlled.

  When the number of navigation stocks is acquired while the AT flag indicating AT is set, the number of navigation stocks acquired this time is added to the number of navigation stocks specified by the AT flag.

  For example, when the AT lottery is carried out while the AT flag indicating the AT is set, the AT flag is updated according to the result of the AT lottery. Updating the AT flag according to the result of the AT lottery means, for example, adding the number of navigation stocks specified according to the AT lag stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 91c by adding the number of navigation stocks according to the result of this AT lottery. The AT flag may be rewritten to specify the number of navigation stocks, and any method may be used as long as the current AT flag can be specified according to the result of the AT lottery.

  The sub-control unit 91 manages control to the AT based on the AT flag that is set according to the result of the AT lottery when normal and RT1 to RT4.

  Specifically, in the normal / RT1, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT when the AT flag identifies the AT. That is, when the navigation stock remains, control of the AT is started. In the period from the transition from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, the navigation effect can be executed under the control of the AT without consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks.

  When controlled by AT and controlled from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, the condition for starting to AT by consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks by 1 is satisfied, and 50 games are exhausted. Until that time, it is controlled to RT which is a high probability of winning the re-game combination and ART which is AT. When the number of navistock is consumed by 1, the AT flag indicating the number of navistock subtracted by 1 is updated.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 controls the non-AT when the number of remaining games becomes 0 when the game is ART. At this time, if the number of navigation stocks indicated by the AT flag is 0, the AT flag indicating that it is not an AT is updated. That is, the condition for ending a series of ATs is satisfied when the AT flag when the AT is controlled to the non-AT is the navistock number.

  When it is specified that the AT flag is not the AT when the non-AT is controlled, the AT is not controlled again and the navigation effect is not executed. As a result, when the normal / RT0 or the normal / RT2 is set, there is a high possibility that the transition results are aligned and the possibility that the normal / RT1 control is performed is increased.

  On the other hand, if the number of navigation stocks specified by the AT flag when controlled to a non-AT is 1 or more, the number of navigation stocks is consumed by 1 and the ATs of 50 games are continuously controlled. Then, the number of navi stock becomes 0, and the number of navi becomes 0, so that the AT ends.

  When the AT flag specifies that it is AT, the sub control unit 91 executes the navigation effect by winning the navigation target combination according to the game state. The navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state is replay GR1 to 6 when normal / RT1, replay GR11 to 16 and replay GR21 to 25 when normal / RT0, and replay GR31 when normal / RT2. ~ 36. In addition, in normal / RT0 to 3, the push order bell is a common navigation target combination.

  The sub-control unit 91 controls the AT by setting the AT flag when the AT lottery is won and executing the AT control process (not shown) when the routine is RT1 to RT4.

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 controls to the AT when the AT flag identifies the AT in the normal / RT4 or the normal / RT1. During the period from the transition from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, the number of games at the AT is controlled without being counted and the navigation effect can be executed.

  When controlled by AT and controlled by normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, the condition for starting ART (assist replay time) is satisfied. Then, during a predetermined number of games (50 games in the present embodiment), the AT (that is, ART) in normal / RT0, RT2, RT3 with a high winning probability of the re-game combination is controlled. The sub-control unit 91 clears the AT flag and controls the non-AT when the number of remaining games becomes 0 in ART.

  When controlled to non-AT, the navigation effect is not executed. As a result, when normal / RT0 or normal / RT2 or normal / RT3, there is a high possibility that the transition results will be the same, and a high possibility of being controlled by normal / RT1.

  In the AT control processing, when the AT flag specifies that the AT is the AT control processing, the sub control unit 91 executes the navigation effect by winning the navigation target combination according to the game state. The navigation target combination according to the game state is replay GR1-6 when normal / RT1, replay GR11-16 and replay GR21-25 when normal / RT0, normal / RT2 or normal / RT3 Replay GR 31-36 at one time. In addition, in normal / RT0 to 3, the push order bell is a common navigation target combination.

  As a navigation effect when the replays GR1 to 6 are won, the push order for winning the promotion replay is notified according to the winning situation. For example, as the navigation effect when the replay GR1 is won, a message such as "left middle right!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when the replay GR2 is won, a message such as “left and right middle!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when the replay GR3 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when the replay GR4 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the player wins the replay GR5, a message such as “Right Left Middle!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR6 is won, a message such as “Right Middle Left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when the replays GR11 to 16 are won, the push order for winning the promotion replay is notified according to the winning situation. For example, as a navigation effect when the replay GR11 is won, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when the replay GR12 is won, a message such as “left and right middle!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR13 is won, a message such as "middle left and right!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 14 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when the replay GR15 is won, a message such as “Right Left Middle!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when the replay GR16 is won, a message such as "right middle left!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when winning the replays GR21 to 25, the pushing order for winning the special replay is notified according to the winning situation. For example, as the navigation effect when the replay GR21 is won, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR22 is won, a message such as “left and right middle!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as the navigation effect when the replay GR23 is won, a message such as "middle left and right!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR24 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as the navigation effect when the replay GR25 is won, a message such as "right!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect (excluding RT3) when winning the replays GR31 to 36, the push order for winning the SP replay is notified according to the winning situation. For example, as the navigation effect when the replay GR 31 is won, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when the replay GR32 is won, a message such as “left and right middle!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 33 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR34 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navi effect when the replay GR35 is won, a message such as “Right Left Middle!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 36 is won, a message such as “Right Middle Left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In addition, as a navigation effect when one of the push order bells is won, the push order for surely winning the downward right bell or the middle bell is notified. For example, when the left bell is won, by stopping the left reel as the first stop reel, the right downward bell can be surely won, so that “left!” For stopping the left reel as the first stop reel. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, when the middle bell is won, the middle reel can be surely won by stopping the middle reel as the first stop reel, and therefore, "middle!" For stopping the middle reel as the first stop reel. The message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Also, when the right bell is won, the middle reel can be surely won by stopping the right reel as the first stop reel. Therefore, "right!" For stopping the right reel as the first stop reel. The message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As described above, in the navigation effect according to the present embodiment, a message that evokes an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified in the same mode regardless of the type of the navigation target winning combination. Therefore, the player can operate in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player without being aware of the type of the winning navigation target combination.

  The mode of the navigation effect is not limited to such a mode, and may be any mode as long as the player can distinguish it according to the winning situation. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to the one displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and may be performed using the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  By executing the navigation effect, it is possible to intentionally win the promotion replay prize, the special replay prize, the SP replay prize, the bell prize, and the fall replay prize avoidance.

[Net increase count processing]
Next, the net increase count process (Sp5) executed in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the net increase count process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether the AT flag is set (Sc1). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process ends. When the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not the bet number is set by determining whether or not the medal insertion command from the main control unit 41 is received (Sc2). If the bet number is not set, the process proceeds to Sc3. When the number of bets is set, the number of medals corresponding to the number of bets (three in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the net increase counter that counts the net increase (Sc3). In Sc4, it is determined whether or not the payout of medals is generated based on the winning number command from the main control unit 41 (Sc4). If no medals have been paid out, the process ends. When the payout of medals occurs, the number of paid-out medals is added to the net increase counter, and the process ends (Sc5).

[Notification effect execution process]
Next, the notification effect execution process (Sp6) executed in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the notification effect execution process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not a payout of medals has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41. A determination is made (Sq1). If no medals have been paid out, the process ends. When the payout of medals occurs, it is determined whether the AT flag is set (Sq2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process ends. When the AT flag is set, whether or not the net increase counted by the net increase counter in the net increase counting process of FIG. 20 has reached a specified number (whether or not the specified number has been exceeded in this embodiment). ) Is determined (Sq3). In the present embodiment, the specified number is set to 1000, 2500, 5000, 10000.

  When the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 indicates that the net increase has reached the specified number on the liquid crystal display 51 (Sq4). The specified number reaching display can be displayed in various modes such as a display of the number of acquired characters (“1000 sheets OVER!”, Etc.), a graph, a character type or color. After the display indicating that the specified number has been reached, the process ends.

  If the net increase has not reached the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the number of coins to be paid out (that is, the player has won the medal) (Sq5). The acquired number display can be displayed in various modes such as a display of the number of acquired characters ("8 GET!", Etc.), a graph, a character type or color. After displaying the acquired number of sheets, the process ends.

[Specific Example of First Embodiment]
Next, a specific example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 22, the reel rotation state and the display contents of the liquid crystal display 51 at that time are arranged. The arrow in the display window 3 indicates that the reel is rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, it is assumed that the AT game is started and the intermediate bell is won in a state where the number of net additions at the AT is 0. At this time, from the liquid crystal display 51, "TOTAL 0" is displayed at the upper part of the screen as a net additional number display 300 at the AT. In addition, "bell!" Is displayed in the center of the screen as a winning combination display 301 showing a winning combination that has been won in the internal lottery. Further, the push order display 302 is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The push order display 302 indicates that the stop switch is operated in the order shown by the numbers. It should be noted that in the figure, the pressing order display 302 shows the order of middle → right → left.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell is won, the net additional number display 300 becomes "8". Further, "8 GET !!" is displayed as the acquired number display 303 (see Sq5 in FIG. 21).

  As shown in FIG. 22B, it is assumed that the AT game is started and the intermediate bell is won in a state where the number of net additions at the AT is 999. At this time, "TOTAL 999 sheets" is displayed as the net additional number display 300 on the AT. Further, “bell!” Is displayed as the winning combination display 301. Further, the push order display 302 is displayed.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell is won, the net added number display 300 becomes "1007". In addition, “1000 sheets OVER !!” is displayed as the specified number arrival display 304 (see Sq4 in FIG. 21).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the fact that the payout has occurred is notified, and when the net increase reaches the specified number when the payout occurs, the net increase is performed without notifying that the payout has occurred. Informs that it has reached the specified number. Therefore, the player can simultaneously recognize that the net increase has reached the specified number and that the payout has occurred. Further, by notifying only that the net increase has reached the specified number efficiently, it is possible to make more impression that the net increase has reached the specified number.

  Further, in the first embodiment, it is set that medals are paid out as the first event, and that the net increase number reaches the specified number as the second event. Therefore, it is possible to make a more impressive impression that the net increase number for the payout of medals, which is advantageous for the player, has reached the specified number.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase has reached the specified number. Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the specified number.

  In the first embodiment, when the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display device 51 only displays that the specified number has been reached. However, it is possible that the other devices such as the speakers 53 and 54 have paid out medals. The notification may be provided separately from the prescribed notification display. That is, when the second event occurs, the same means does not have to notify the occurrence of the first event.

[Regarding Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. Detailed description of the parts described in the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be described in detail.

[Notification effect execution process]
In the second embodiment, a notification effect execution process different from that in FIG. 21 is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the notification effect execution process according to the second embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the winning number command is received from the main control unit 41, thereby paying out medals. It is determined whether it has occurred (Ss1). If no medals have been paid out, the process ends. When the payout of medals occurs, it is determined whether the AT flag is set (Ss2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process ends. When the AT flag is set, whether or not the net increase counted by the net increase counter in the net increase counting process of FIG. 20 has reached a specified number (whether or not the specified number has been exceeded in this embodiment). ) Is determined (Ss3). In the present embodiment, the specified number is set to 1000, 2500, 5000, 10000.

  When the net increase reaches the specified number, a medal acquisition sound indicating that the medals have been paid out (that is, the player has won the medal) is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the net increase is specified. The liquid crystal display 51 displays that the specified number has been reached indicating that the number has been reached (Sq4). The medal acquisition sound can be in various forms such as a message output (“medal GET!” Or the like) or a unique sound effect. Further, the specified number reaching display can be displayed in various modes, such as a display of the number of acquired characters (“1000 sheets OVER!”, Etc.), a graph, a character type and color. After outputting the medal acquisition sound and displaying that the specified number has been reached, the process ends.

  If the net increase number has not reached the specified number, the medal acquisition sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as in Ss4, and the fact that the medal has been paid out (that is, the player has won the medal) is output. The liquid crystal display 51 displays the acquired number of sheets (Sq5). The acquired number display can be displayed in various modes such as a display of the number of acquired characters ("8 GET!", Etc.), a graph, a character type or color. After outputting the medal acquisition sound and displaying the number of acquired medals, the process ends.

[Specific Example of Second Embodiment]
Next, a specific example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 24, the reel rotation state and the display contents of the liquid crystal display 51 at that time are arranged. The arrow in the display window 3 indicates that the reel is rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, it is assumed that the AT game is started in a state where the number of net additions at the AT is 0, and the intermediate bell is won. At this time, from the liquid crystal display 51, "TOTAL 0 sheets" is displayed at the upper part of the screen as a net additional number display 400 on the AT. In addition, "bell!" Is displayed in the center of the screen as a winning combination display 401 showing a winning combination that has been won in the internal lottery. Further, the push order display 302 is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The push order display 402 indicates that the stop switch is operated in the order shown by the numbers. It should be noted that in the figure, the pressing order display 402 shows the order of middle → right → left.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell is won, the net additional number display 400 becomes "8". Further, "8 pieces GET !!" is output as a medal acquisition sound from the speakers 53 and 54 (see Ss5 in FIG. 23). Further, “8 GET !!” is displayed as the acquired number display 403 (see Ss5 in FIG. 23).

  As shown in FIG. 24 (b), it is assumed that the AT game is started and the intermediate bell is won in a state where the net number of increase in AT is 999. At this time, "TOTAL 999 sheets" is displayed as the net increase number display 400 on the AT. Further, “bell!” Is displayed as the winning combination display 401. Further, the push order display 402 is displayed.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell is won, the net added number display 400 becomes "1007". Further, "8 pieces GET !!" is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as a medal acquisition sound (see Ss4 in FIG. 23). Further, “1000 sheets OVER !!” is displayed as the prescribed number arrival display 404 (see Ss4 in FIG. 23).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net increase number does not reach the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 inform the occurrence of the payout, and the payout is performed. When it occurs and the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase has reached the specified number, and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred. Therefore, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 informs that the net increase has reached the specified number. Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the specified number.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, as a first event, it is set that medals are paid out, and in the second event, it is set that the net increase number reaches a specified number. Therefore, even when notifying that different events related to payout of medals, which are advantageous to the player, have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without obstructing the other notification.

[Regarding Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. Detailed description of the parts described in the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be described in detail.

[Additional lottery processing for AT games]
In the third embodiment, the AT game number addition lottery for determining whether or not to add the AT game number is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the AT game number increase lottery process, the sub control unit 91 ends the game by determining whether or not the reel acceleration information command from the main control unit 41 has been received. When the game starts, it is determined whether the AT flag is set (Sj2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process ends. When the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not the addition condition is satisfied (Sj3). The additional condition is, for example, when the winning combination is won by the internal lottery. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the addition condition is satisfied by determining whether or not any winning combination is won based on the winning number command from the main control unit 41. If the addition condition is not satisfied, the process ends.

  When the additional condition is satisfied, the additional lottery is executed (Sj4). The additional lottery is executed with a probability according to the type of winning combination won in the internal lottery. When the additional lottery is completed, the number of additional games determined in the additional lottery is set in the AT game number counter (Sj5). Next, the addition effect flag indicating that the addition effect is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the process ends (Sj6). The number of additional games determined by the additional lottery is also stored in the RAM 91c so that the number of additional games can be identified. Further, the number of games to be added is selected from a plurality of kinds of games, but at least 10 games are added.

[Notification effect execution process]
In the third embodiment, a notification effect execution process different from that of FIG. 21 is executed within the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the notification effect execution process according to the third embodiment, the sub control unit 91 determines whether the T flag is set (St1). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process ends. If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not a payout of medals has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41 (St2).

  When the payout of medals occurs, the number of games in AT (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as AT game number) is added based on whether or not the addition effect flag is set in Sj6 of FIG. It is determined whether or not (St3).

  When the AT game number is added, a medal acquisition sound indicating that a medal has been acquired is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and an AT game number addition display indicating that the AT game number is added is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is performed at 51 (St4). The medal acquisition sound can be in various forms such as a message output (“medal GET!” Or the like) or a unique sound effect. Further, the AT game number addition display can be displayed in various modes such as a display of the number of characters acquired by characters (eg, "10 games added!"), A graph display, a character type or color display. After outputting the medal acquisition sound and displaying the number of AT games added, the addition effect flag is cleared and the process ends.

  If the addition effect flag is not set and it is determined that the number of AT games has not been added, a medal acquisition sound indicating that the medals have been paid out (that is, the player has won the medal) is output. In addition to outputting from the speakers 53 and 54, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the acquired number of coins indicating that the medals have been paid out (that is, the player has won the medals) (St5). The acquired number display can be displayed in various modes such as a display of the number of acquired characters ("8 GET!", Etc.), a graph, a character type or color. After outputting the medal acquisition sound and displaying the number of acquired medals, the addition effect flag is cleared and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout of medals has not occurred in St2, it is determined whether or not the number of AT games has been added based on whether or not the addition effect flag has been set in Sj6 of FIG. Yes (St6). If the addition effect flag is not set and the number of AT games is not added, the process ends.

  When the AT game number is added, the AT game number addition sound indicating that the AT game number is added is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the AT game number addition indicating that the AT game number is added is output. The display is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 (St7). The AT game number addition sound can be in various forms such as a message output (“10 games addition!”) Or a unique sound effect. After the AT game number addition sound is output and the AT game number addition display is performed, the addition effect flag is cleared and the process is ended.

[Specific Example of Third Embodiment]
Next, a specific example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 27, the reel rotation state and the display contents of the liquid crystal display 51 at that time are arranged. The arrow in the display window 3 indicates that the reel is rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when the middle bell wins during the AT, “8 GET !!” is displayed as the acquired number display 500 (see St5 in FIG. 26). Further, "8 pieces GET !!" is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as a medal acquisition sound (see St5 in FIG. 26).

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when a normal replay is won during AT and an additional lottery is won, AT game number additional display 501 is displayed as "10 additional games !!" (see St7 in FIG. 26). Further, "10 games are added !!" is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as an AT game addition sound (see St7 in FIG. 26).

  As shown in FIG. 27 (c), if the bell (any of the left bell, the middle bell, and the right bell) is won during AT and the lottery is won, the AT game number extra display 501 is displayed as "10 games extra !!" Is displayed (see St4 in FIG. 26). Further, "8 pieces GET !!" is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as a medal acquisition sound (see St4 in FIG. 26).

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the payout occurs and the number of AT games is not increased, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 inform the generation of the payout, and the payout does not occur. When the number of AT games is increased, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the number of AT games has been increased, and when payout occurs and the number of AT games is increased, the liquid crystal display 51 Informs that the number of AT games has been added and informs that the payout has occurred through the speakers 53 and 54. Therefore, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

  Further, in the third embodiment, at least 10 games are added, so the number of medals obtained by adding the number of AT games is larger than the number of medals obtained by one winning. Therefore, notification of the number of additional games has a higher notification priority. Then, the liquid crystal display 51 informs the player of the addition of the number of AT games having a higher priority of informing the player than the occurrence of the payout. Therefore, the number of AT games can be further impressed.

[Modification 1]
Next, a first modification of the first to third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. In the first modification, a notification effect indicating that the net increase exceeds the specified number is executed. In addition, the net increase is counted until 50 games are exhausted after the end of AT. When the AT is controlled again and the net increase number reaches the specified number by the time 50 games are exhausted, the notification effect is not executed for the specified number that has already been the target of the notification effect. Further, when the notification effect and the continuous effect indicating whether or not the AT continues, the execution of the notification effect is restricted. Then, when the medals are paid out again, the notification effect is executed.

  Then, the specified number reached display in FIG. 21 in the first embodiment and the specified number reached display in FIG. 23 in the second embodiment can be implemented as the notification effect in the modified example 1. Further, in addition to the notification effect execution process of FIG. 26, it is possible to further implement the modified example 1 for the third embodiment. Specific processing will be described below for the first modification, but detailed description of the same parts as those in the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

[Notification effect execution process]
Next, the notification effect execution process in the first modification will be described. The notification effect execution process in the first modification is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 28, in the notification effect execution process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the payout of medals has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41. The determination is made (Sh1). If no medals have been paid out, the process ends. When the payout of medals occurs, it is determined whether the AT flag is set (Sh2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process ends. When the AT flag is set, whether or not the net increase counted by the net increase counter in the net increase counting process of FIG. 20 has reached a specified number (whether or not the specified number has been exceeded in this embodiment). ) Is determined (Sh3). If the net increase has not reached the specified number, the process ends.

  When the net increase number reaches the specified number, it is determined whether or not the notified flag corresponding to the reached specified number is set (Sh4). That is, it is determined whether or not the notification effect for notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number has already been executed for the reached specified number. If the notification effect for the specified number that has reached has already been executed and the notification flag has been set, the processing ends.

  When the notification effect for the specified number that has reached has not been executed yet and the notification flag has not been set, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect executed in Sg4 of FIG. 29 is being executed (Sh5). If the continuous effect is being executed, the process ends. When the continuous effect is not being executed, the notification effect that notifies that the net increase number has reached the specified number is executed (Sh6). The notification effect is executed by displaying a message or a character indicating the fact on the liquid crystal display 51. When the notification effect is executed, the notified flag corresponding to the notified specified number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the process ends (Sh7). At this time, the specified number used for comparison with the next net increase is selected, and the selected specified number is stored and set.

  The net increase is cleared when the number of games after the AT reaches 50. Then, for example, even though AT ends and the net increase decreases, and the net increase falls below the specified number, the AT is controlled again before the number of games after the AT reaches 50 games, and the net increase reaches the specified number again. When the net increase reaches the specified number again before the net increase is cleared, for example, the judgment of Sh4 is performed and the notification effect is performed again for the specified number. Regulate what is seen. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from making an impression that the number of medals has decreased after AT has ended.

  Further, when the execution of the continuous production and the execution of the notification production overlap, the determination of Sh5 is performed to execute the continuous production without executing the notification production, and the notification production is again paid out and the net increase is defined. Since it is executed when the number reaches the number, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow that the notification effect is executed when the payout of medals occurs is not broken, so that the player feels uncomfortable. The game can proceed so that it does not exist. It should be noted that the overlap of the execution of the continuous effect and the execution of the notification effect means that the execution timings of both effects overlap in the same game, and both the case where a part of the execution period overlaps and the case where all the execution periods overlap. Including.

[Continuous production execution process]
Next, the continuous effect execution process in the first modification will be described. The continuous effect execution process in the first modification is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the continuous effect execution process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the game is started by determining whether or not the reel acceleration information command from the main control unit 41 is received. Yes (Sg1). If the game has not started, the process ends. When the game starts, it is determined whether the AT flag is set (Sg2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process ends. When the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not the number of games until the end of AT is within 5 games (Sg3). When the number of games until the end of AT is within 5 games, continuation of notifying whether AT continues (that is, whether or not navigation stock remains and is controlled by AT again after AT ends) The effect is executed (Sg4).

  The continuous effect is an effect having a storyline that is performed over five games. Then, as a result of the effect, whether or not the AT continues in the final game of the AT is notified. Specifically, for example, a state in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle with each other is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 51, and sound associated with this is output from the speakers 53 and 54. Then, in the final game of the AT, if the AT continues, the ally character wins, and if the AT does not continue, the enemy character wins and the effect ends.

  In this way, the continuation effect that notifies the possibility that the navigation stock different from the payout of the medal is given is executed, and the continuation effect is controlled by the AT by winning the cherry that may be given the navigation stock. Since it is executed from time to time, it can attract the attention of the player who is paying attention to the possibility that navigation stock will be given. In particular, since the continuous effect is executed as the continuous effect, it is possible to further attract the player's attention.

  In addition, since the continuous effect is an effect having a story, it is possible to attract the attention of the player who is paying attention to the continuous effect having a story.

[Modification 2]
Next, a modified example 2 of the first to third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. In the second modification, a notification effect indicating that the net increase has exceeded the specified number is executed. In addition, the net increase is counted until 50 games are exhausted after the end of AT. When the AT is controlled again and the net increase number reaches the specified number by the time 50 games are exhausted, the notification effect is not executed for the specified number that has already been the target of the notification effect. Further, when the addition effect for notifying the number of AT addition games and the notification effect overlap, execution of the addition effect is restricted. Then, when the addition condition is satisfied again, the addition effect is executed.

  Then, it is possible to implement the specified number reached display of FIG. 21 in the first embodiment and the specified number reached display of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment as the notification effect in the modified example 2. Further, the AT game number addition display of FIG. 26 in the third embodiment can be implemented as the addition effect in the modified example 2. Specific processing will be described below for the second modification, but detailed description of the same portions as those of the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

[Notification effect execution process]
Next, the notification effect execution process in Modification 2 will be described. The notification effect execution process in the second modification is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the notification effect execution process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the payout of medals has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41. The judgment is made (Sm1). If no medals have been paid out, the process ends. When the payout of medals occurs, it is determined whether the AT flag is set (Sm2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process ends. When the AT flag is set, whether or not the net increase counted by the net increase counter in the net increase counting process of FIG. 20 has reached a specified number (whether or not the specified number has been exceeded in this embodiment). ) Is determined (Sm3). If the net increase has not reached the specified number, the process ends.

  When the net increase number has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the notified flag corresponding to the reached specified number is set (Sm4). That is, it is determined whether or not the notification effect for notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number has already been executed for the reached specified number. If the notification effect for the specified number that has reached has already been executed and the notification flag has been set, the processing ends.

  If the notification effect for the specified number that has reached is not yet executed and the notified flag is not set, the notification effect that notifies that the net increase number has reached the specified number is executed (Sm5). The notification effect is executed by displaying a message or a character indicating the fact on the liquid crystal display 51. When the notification effect is executed, the notified flag corresponding to the notified specified number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the process ends (Sm6).

[Additional effect execution processing]
Next, the additional effect execution process in the second modification will be described. The additional effect execution process in the modification 2 is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the additional effect execution process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the game has ended by determining whether or not the reel stop position 3 command from the main control unit 41 has been received. The determination is made (Sr1). If the game has not ended, the process ends. When the game is over, it is determined whether the AT flag is set (Sr2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process ends. If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not the additional effect flag is set in Sj6 of FIG. 25 (Sr3). If the addition effect flag is not set, the process ends.

  When the addition effect flag is set, it is determined whether or not the payout of medals has occurred by determining whether or not the winning number command from the main control unit 41 is received (Sr4). If no medals have been paid out, the process proceeds to Sr6. When the payout of medals occurs, it is determined whether or not the notification effect by Sm5 of FIG. 30 is executed (Sr5). If the notification effect is executed, the process ends. In Sr6, the additional effect is executed (Sr6). The additional effect is executed by displaying the number of additional games from the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, when the addition effect is not executed because the notification effect is being executed, when the addition effect is executed again and the addition lottery is performed, when the addition effect is executed, the game added at that time is executed. Only the number may be reported, or the number of additional games that have not been reported because the additional presentation has not been executed may be reported.

  In this way, when the execution of the addition effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the notification effect is executed without executing the addition effect, and the addition effect is executed again when the addition condition is satisfied and the addition lottery is performed. Therefore, even if the execution time of the addition effect is changed, the flow of the addition effect being executed when the addition condition is satisfied is not broken, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling discomfort. it can.

  In addition, as a specific effect, the additional effect that notifies the possibility that an AT additional game number different from payout of medals is given is executed, and since the additional effect is executed when the watermelon is won, the additional game number is given. It is possible to attract the attention of the player who is paying attention to the possibility of being played.

[Specific Examples in Modification 1 and Modification 2]
Next, specific examples of Modification 1 and Modification 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. 32 shows a specific example of restricting the notification performance again. FIG. 33 shows a specific example in which the specific effect is executed without executing the notification effect when the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect overlap. FIG. 34 shows a specific example in which the notification effect is executed without executing the specific effect when the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect overlap.

[Specific example of restricting notification production]
As shown in FIG. 32, when the net increase number reaches 1000 which is the specified number during AT, the notification effect is executed (Sh3, Sh6 in FIG. 28). At this time, the notified flag is set (Sh7 in FIG. 28). After that, even after the AT ends, the net increase count is continued until 50 games after the AT ends. Then, as shown in the non-AT section in the figure, it is assumed that AT ends and the net increase number decreases. Next, it is assumed that the player wins the AT lottery within 50 games after finishing the AT and is controlled by the AT again. Then, it is assumed that the net increase number again reaches the specified number of 1000 sheets in the AT again. At this time, since the notification effect has already been executed for the specified number of 1000 sheets, execution of the notification effect is restricted (determined as Y in Sh4 of FIG. 28). Therefore, the notification effect is not executed.

[Specific example giving priority to specific effects]
As shown in FIG. 33A, it is assumed that the 50th game, which is the final game of the AT of the first set (AT started by the consumption of the first navigation stock), has started. At this time, from the liquid crystal display 51, 994 sheets are displayed at the upper part of the screen as the net additional number display 200 on the AT, and the fact that it is the 50th game is displayed at the upper part of the screen as the game number display 201 on the AT. .. Further, as a continuous effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the battle between the ally character 202 and the enemy character 203 in the center of the screen. Further, a push order display 204 indicating a push order is displayed at the bottom of the screen as a navigation effect. The push order display shows the push order by numbers. It should be noted that in the figure, the push order display 204 is in the order of middle → right → left.

  Then, it is assumed that the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated and the middle bell wins. When the middle bell wins, eight medals are paid out, so the net additional number display 200 is updated to a display showing 1002. At this time, the number of net additions exceeds the specified number of 1000, but since the execution of the continuous effect is duplicated, the notification effect is not executed and the continuous effect is executed (determined as Y in Sh5 of FIG. 28). In the continuation effect, a state in which the teammate character 202 has won the enemy character 203 is displayed, and it is notified that the AT will continue.

  As shown in FIG. 33B, when the navigation stock is consumed by 1 and the AT of the second set is started, the net increase display 200 is updated to the display showing 999 by subtracting 3 from the bet number. It Further, the game number display 201 is updated to the display showing the first game. At this time, it is assumed that the push order display 204 is displayed. Then, it is assumed that the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated as shown and the middle bell wins. When the middle bell wins, eight medals are paid out, so the net additional number display 200 is updated to display 1007. At this time, the net added number exceeds the prescribed number of 1000, and since the continuous effect has not been executed, the notification effect is executed (Sh6 in FIG. 28). As a notification effect, a message 205 indicating that the specified number of 1000 has been exceeded is displayed in the center of the screen.

[Specific example in which notification effect is prioritized]
As shown in FIG. 34A, for example, it is assumed that the 25th AT game has started. At this time, 999 are displayed at the upper part of the screen as the net added number display 200, and the fact that it is the 25th game is displayed at the upper part of the screen as the AT game number display 201. Further, a message 206 indicating that the watermelon (weak watermelon or strong watermelon) has been won is displayed from the liquid crystal display 51. At this time, the additional lottery for determining the number of additional games in AT is executed (Sj4 in FIG. 25).

  Then, it is assumed that the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated and the rightward-downward watermelon wins. When the right-down watermelon wins, five medals are paid out, so the net increase in number display 200 is updated to a display showing 1004. At this time, the number of net additions exceeds the specified number of 1000, so the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the addition effect overlap, but the addition effect is not executed and the notification effect is executed (Sm5 in FIG. 30, FIG. 30). 31: Sr5: Y determination). Then, as a notification effect, a message 205 indicating that the specified number of 1000 has been exceeded is displayed in the center of the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), it is assumed that the 26th AT game has started. The net increase display 200 is updated to a display showing 1001 by subtracting 3 from the number of bets. Further, the game number display 201 is updated to the display showing the 26th game. Further, a message 206 indicating that the watermelon (weak watermelon or strong watermelon) has been won is displayed from the liquid crystal display 51. At this time, the additional lottery for determining the number of additional games in AT is executed (Sj4 in FIG. 25).

  Then, it is assumed that the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated and the rightward-downward watermelon wins. When the right-down watermelon wins, five medals are paid out, so the net increase in number display 200 is updated to a display showing 1006. At this time, since the notification effect is not executed, the additional effect is executed (Sr6 in FIG. 31). Then, a message 207 indicating that 10 games have been added is displayed in the center of the screen as an additional effect.

[Modification 3]
Next, a modified example 3 of the first embodiment to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. In the modified example 3, the display of the number of medals acquired in the AT is changed to the number of games to be added to the AT.

  Then, the specified number reached display and the acquired number display of FIG. 21 in the first embodiment, the specified number reached display and the acquired number display of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment, and the acquired number display of FIG. 26 are added to the AT in the modified example 3. Modification 3 can be applied to the first to third embodiments by changing the game number display. Specific processing will be described below for the third modification, but detailed description of the same portions as those of the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

  First, the timer interrupt process (sub) in Modification 3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the RAM 91c (step Sd1), and when an unprocessed command is not stored (step Sd1; No), the process ends. If an unprocessed command is stored (step Sd1; Yes), each effect device is controlled based on the oldest command. That is, the sub control unit 91 controls each rendering device in the order of the received commands.

  The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the command is an internal winning command (a command corresponding to the winning number command of the above embodiment) (step Sd2). When the command is not the internal winning command (step Sd2; No), the sub control unit 91 executes a process according to the type of command (step Sd17), and ends the process. When the command is the internal winning command (step Sd2; Yes), the sub control unit 91 stores the winning flag in the RAM 91c (step Sd3), and determines whether the AT flag is on (step Sd4). The AT flag is a flag that is set in the RAM 91c and indicates whether or not the AT state is set. When the AT state is set, the AT flag is turned on, and when the AT state is not set, the AT flag is set.

  When the AT flag is off (step Sd4; No), the sub-control unit 91 performs AT lottery processing (step Sd5). After the AT lottery process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT is won by the lottery process (step Sd6). If the AT is won (step Sd6; Yes), the AT flag of the RAM 91c is turned on (step Sd7), and the number of games (the number of won games) given to the AT game number counter set in the RAM 91c is added ( Step Sd8), and proceeds to the next processing. In the modified example 3, the number of games (the number of games added to the AT game number counter) provided when winning the AT in the AT lottery process is 50 games (50 games after the RT0 state is entered). Is set in advance.

  When the AT flag is ON (step Sd4; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 performs an AT continuous lottery process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games added to the AT (the number of games that have been continuously won, the amount of privilege) ( A lottery corresponding to the additional lottery of the above embodiment is performed (step Sd9). When the sub-control unit 91 executes the AT continuous lottery process, as shown in FIG. 36, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the cherry winning combination or the watermelon winning combination is internally won (step Se1). Here, the role of cherry specifically refers to “BB + cherry”, “BB + cherry + 1 sheet role”, “RB + cherry”, “RB + cherry 1 sheet role”, “cherry”, “cherry + 1 sheet role”, It means "bell 1 + watermelon + cherry (middle bell)" (see FIG. 7). In addition, the watermelon role is specifically “BB + watermelon”, “BB + watermelon + 1 piece”, “RB + watermelon”, “RB + watermelon + 1 piece”, “watermelon”, “watermelon + 1 piece”, Bell 1 + watermelon + cherry (middle bell).

  When the internal winning of the role of cherry or watermelon has been won (step Se1; Yes), the sub control unit 91 continuously wins the AT using the continuous lottery table at the time of winning the cherry or the continuous lottery table at the time of winning the watermelon (additional game A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a number (step Se2).

  Here, the continuous lottery table at the time of winning the cherry and the continuous lottery table at the time of winning the watermelon will be described. In the continuous lottery table at the time of winning the cherry, a ratio (continuous winning ratio) to which the number of additional games of AT is given when the internal winning command is the role of cherry is set. In the present embodiment, when the internal winning command is the role of cherry, the number of additional games to be added is ± 0, that is, the non-winning ratio is 50 [%], and the +5 game ratio is 5 [%]. , The ratio of +10 games is 20 [%], the ratio of +30 games is 15 [%], the ratio of +50 games is 5 [%], the ratio of +100 games is 4.5 [%], and +300 games. Is set to 0.5 [%].

  In addition, in the continuous lottery table at the time of winning the watermelon, a ratio to which the number of AT additional games is given when the internal winning command is the role of watermelon is set. In the present embodiment, as a rate to which the number of additional games when the internal winning command is the role of watermelon is given, a rate of ± 0 (non-winning) is 90 [%], a rate of +5 games is 5 [%], The ratio of +10 games is 0 [%], the ratio of +30 games is 0 [%], the ratio of +50 games is 3 [%], the ratio of +100 games is 1 [%], and the ratio of +300 games is It is set to 1 [%].

  Returning to FIG. 36, after the AT continuous lottery by winning the role of cherry or watermelon, or when the role of cherry or watermelon is not internally won (step Se1; No), the sub control unit 91 is set in the RAM 91c. By referring to the AT medal acquisition number counter, it is determined whether or not the number of medals acquired after AT start (net medal increase number) has reached a specific game history reaching a predetermined number (step Se3).

  In order to control in this way, the sub-control unit 91 of the modified example 3 uses the number of medals acquired as history data based on the winning determination command (command indicating the result of winning determination) received from the main control unit 41. The AT medal acquisition number counter, which is stored in the RAM 91c, counts (counts) the medal acquisition number (net medal increase number) from the start of AT from the history data. Further, in the modification 3, 100, 250, 500, 1000, ... Are set as the predetermined number. Therefore, in the modified example 3, for a plurality of predetermined number of sheets, the difference number of sheets (100-0 = 100 [sheets], 250-100 = 150 [sheets], 500-250 = 250 [sheets], 1000-500 = 500 [sheets]) is set in advance. In Modification 3, since the average net increase of medals in the RT0 to 3 states during AT control is 2 or more, for example, 50 games or less (100 / 2 = 50 [G]), and the next 250 sheets will be reached in 75 games or less ((250-100) / 2 = 50 [G]).

  Further, in Modification 3, the average net increase of medals in the RT0 to 3 states during the AT control is 2 or more, and at least 50 games can be digested after the AT shifts to the RT0 to 3 state. Therefore, the AT control is performed. The ratio of reaching 100 medals after transitioning to the RT0 to RT3 state is higher than the ratio of not reaching 100 medals. Further, in the present embodiment, the average net increase of medals in other gaming states before the transition to the RT0 to 3 states in the AT control is 1 or more, and the AT is the AT game number counter until the transition to the RT0 to 3 states. Does not consume the remaining number of games. For this reason, the rate at which the number of medals acquired after the start of AT reaches 100 is even higher than the rate at which 100 medals are not reached.

  The sub-control unit 91 ends the AT lottery process when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT has not reached the predetermined number (step Se3; No). On the other hand, when the number of medals acquired after the AT starts reaches a predetermined number (step Se3; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 uses the continuous lottery table when the predetermined number of medals is acquired to determine whether or not the AT is allowed to continue to win. (Step Se4), and the AT lottery process ends.

  Here, the continuous lottery table when the predetermined number of sheets is acquired will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 15C, in the continuous lottery table when 100 coins are acquired, when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT is 100, the ratio of the number of additional games to AT is given It is set. In the modified example 3, when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT reaches 100, the percentage of the added game number is ± 0 (non-winning) is 0%, +5 games. The ratio is 40 [%], the ratio of +10 games is 40 [%], the ratio of +30 games is 10 [%], the ratio of +50 games is 5 [%], and the ratio of +100 games is 4 [%]. , +300 games is set to 1 [%]. Therefore, in Modification 3, the continuous lottery table for 100 coin acquisition is set so that when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT reaches 100, the AT is continuously won and the number of additional games is +5 or more. Has been done.

  Further, for example, in the continuous lottery table when 250 coins are acquired, the ratio of the number of additional games to be added to the AT when the number of medals to be acquired after starting AT is 250 is set. In the modified example 3, when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT is 250, the percentage of the added game number is ± 0 (non-winning) is 40 [%], +5 games. The ratio is 10%, the ratio of +10 games is 30%, the ratio of +30 games is 10%, the ratio of +50 games is 5%, and the ratio of +100 games is 4%. , +300 games is set to 1 [%]. Although illustration is omitted, even when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT becomes 500, 1000, etc., 500 coins similar to the continuous lottery table for 250 coins acquisition shown in FIG. 15D. A continuous lottery table for acquisition and a continuous lottery table for 1000 cards are provided. Therefore, in the modified example 3, when the number of medals acquired since the start of the AT is 250, 500, 1000, etc., there is a possibility that the AT is not continuously won and the number of additional games may not be given. Are set respectively. In addition, in Modification 3, the continuous lottery table for each predetermined number of coins other than the continuous lottery table for 100 coins has been illustrated as a case where the percentage of non-winning is not 0%. Like the lottery table, it may be 0% (the number of additional games may be given at a rate of 100%).

  Returning to FIG. 35, after the AT continuous lottery process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT continuation is won by the continuous lottery process (step Sd10). If the player has won the AT continuation (step Sd10; Yes), the number of additional games given to the AT game number counter set in the RAM 91c is added (step Sd11). In the modified example 3, in the AT lottery process and the AT continuous lottery process, when the winning flag is “Cherry + 1”, it is set in advance that the AT win / AT continuous win is performed at a rate of 100%.

  If the AT continuation is not won (step Sd10; Yes), or if the AT continuation is won and the number of games is added to the AT game number counter, the sub control unit 91 refers to the RAM 91c and the winning flag is "normal". It is determined whether or not the flag indicates "replay" (step Sd12). When the winning flag is a flag indicating "normal replay" (step Sd12; Yes), the sub control unit 91 executes the internal push order navigation determination process (step Sd13). The internal push order navigation determination process is a process of determining whether or not to notify the internal push order specified from the received internal winning command.

  In Modification 3, the main control unit 41 outputs the special signal to the outside on the condition that the value of the continuous correct answer counter becomes “3”. The external device receiving the special signal can display the number of times the AT state is controlled (AT number) so that the player can recognize the number. The number of ATs at this time is required to be an accurate value.

  Here, in the case of the configuration in which the AT is terminated on the condition that a predetermined number of games are exhausted, like the slot machine 1 of the modified example 3, for example, “transition to AT state-special part winning / winning-bonus state”. There is a case where the AT state is interrupted due to a transition to the bonus state such as "transition-end of bonus-transition to AT state again". At this time, if the special signal is externally output when the AT state is started, the special signal is externally output again even after the AT state is interrupted, and the number of times the AT lottery process is won. There is a possibility that the special signal may be output to the outside twice and the displayed AT number may be displayed twice, even though the actual AT number is once.

  Therefore, in the third modification, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not to notify the internal pressing order according to the game situation. That is, the sub-control unit 91 notifies the internal push order when it is necessary to output the special signal externally by making the internal push order correct, and notifies the internal push order when it is not necessary to output the special signal externally. do not do. However, even if the internal pushing order is not notified, the value of the continuous correct answer counter may be “3” by the operation of the player, and the special signal may be output. In order to avoid such a situation, when the sub-control unit 91 does not need to output the special signal and the value of the continuous correct answer counter may be "3", the sub-control unit 91 determines that the internal push order is set. Notifies different push order (wrong press order).

  Hereinafter, the situation determined by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 shifts to the AT state for the first time after winning the AT, and the gaming state is the RT0 to 3 states (at the time of first hit AT), "Transition to the AT state after power failure, and the gaming state. Is in the RT0 to 3 state (at the time of AT after power failure) ", it is determined that the special signal needs to be output to the outside.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91, even if the game state is RT0 ~ 3 state, "when transitioning to AT state after AT interruption, the game state is RT0-3 state (at the time of AT after interruption)", "push In the case of transitioning to the RT0 to 3 state after a mistake in order (at the time of RT after a mistake in the pushing order), etc., it is determined that it is not necessary to externally output the special signal.

  A flag based on the number of AT digest games can be used for these determinations. In this case, for example, the sub-control unit 91 turns on the flag set in the RAM 91c when the AT exhaustion game number is 0 at the beginning of AT exhaustion (at the time of initial hit AT). The sub-control unit 91 continues to inform the internal pressing order while the flag is on, and turns off the flag on condition that the value of the continuous correct answer counter becomes “3”, and notifies the internal pressing order of the correct answer. To limit. That is, turning on the flag means that the special signal needs to be output to the outside, and turning off the flag means that the special signal does not need to be output to the outside.

  In addition, when the power failure occurs, the flag may be turned on depending on whether the game machine is in the AT state at the time of the power shutdown process or the activation process, or whether the game state is the RT3 state. Since the flag is turned on after the power is cut off, the sub control unit 91 continues to notify the internal pressing order until the value of the continuous correct answer counter becomes “3”, and when the value of the continuous correct answer counter becomes “3”, The main control unit 41 outputs the special signal to the outside.

  In order to control in this way, the continuous correct answer counter is set in the RAM 91c in the sub control unit 91 as in the main control unit 41. The trigger for updating the continuous correct answer counter may include the value of the continuous correct answer counter in the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91, and may be updated to the same value by the sub control unit 91 receiving the command. It may be updated by the sub-control unit 91 autonomously executing the same process as the process of the main control unit 41.

  After the internal push-order navigation determination process, after turning on the AT flag, or when the AT is not won (step Sd6; No), the sub-control unit 91 stores in the ROM 91a based on the AT flag and the winning flag. The stored effect pattern is selected (step Sd14). Here, when the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected by the selection result according to the result of the internal lottery, that is, the winning flag, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection ratio of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91a, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, the sub control unit 91 refers to the selection ratio from the effect table according to the winning flag, The effect pattern is selected according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c. When the effect pattern is already set in the RAM 91c, such as during continuous effect, the sub control unit 91 proceeds to the process according to the effect pattern without newly selecting the effect pattern.

  After the effect pattern is selected, the sub control unit 91 refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91a to acquire the control pattern, and sets the acquired control pattern in the RAM 91c (step Sd15). In the control pattern table, various patterns corresponding to the types of commands are registered for each of a plurality of types of effect patterns. The effect pattern is, for example, a display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51, a lighting mode of the effect effect LED 52, or the like. In accordance with this control pattern table, the sub control unit 91 executes control of effects according to the progress status of the game.

  When a new command is received during execution of the effect control triggered by the reception of the command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect control being executed and changes the effect corresponding to the newly received command. Control of. That is, even if the effect control is not completed, the effect can be canceled and the effect control based on a new command can be executed. For example, even when an effect based on a command is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, if the player starts the game before the effect is completed, the effect will be canceled.

  Control of the performance being executed according to the command accompanying the operation that is essential for the player to start the game, such as the BET command received when operating the MAXBET switch 6 and the internal winning command received when operating the start switch 7. May be canceled. With such a configuration, the player does not have to bother when he or she wants to start the next game quickly. Further, only for a specific effect, a configuration in which control of the effect is continued regardless of which command is received may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation when the above-described specific effect occurs.

  Then, the sub control unit 91 executes the effect control according to the effect pattern (step Sd16), and ends the process. As described above, since the effect patterns are selected according to the selection rate, even if the same internal winning command that is the result of the same internal lottery is received, the effect patterns are not always the same.

  In Modification 3, when selecting an effect pattern based on various commands (step Sd14, step Sd17), the sub-control unit 91 executes effect pattern selection processing for selecting an effect pattern to be executed on the liquid crystal display 51. To do. After executing the effect pattern selection process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT flag is on, as shown in FIG. 37 (step Sf1). When the AT flag is off (step Sf1; No), the sub control unit 91 selects a normal effect pattern (step Sf2), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the AT flag is ON (step Sf1; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 selects the number notification effect shown in FIG. 38 (A) (step Sf3) and acquires the AT medal set in the RAM 91c. By referring to the number counter, it is judged whether or not the number of medals acquired after the AT starts (net medal increase number) has reached a predetermined number (step Sf4).

  Here, the coin number notification effect 501 is an effect for notifying the number of medals (net medal increase number) acquired from the start of AT counted by the AT medal acquisition number counter. As shown in FIG. 38 (A), the number notification effect 501 of the present embodiment is, for example, “TOTAL +17 coins” in a display mode inconspicuous to the player when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT is 17 coins. Is an effect of displaying an image of a character string “” on the liquid crystal display 51. For example, it is an effect that a person image is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal display 51 and is displayed smaller than the person image on the lower right end of the liquid crystal display 51.

  Returning to FIG. 37, when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT reaches a predetermined number (step Sf4; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 determines the number of additional games and the predetermined number by the AT continuous lottery process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a common number (step Sf5). For example, when the number of additional games is +10 and the predetermined number is 100, “1” and “0” are common numbers. Further, for example, when the number of additional games is +5 and the predetermined number is 100, there is no common number.

When the number of additional games and the predetermined number are common (step Sf5; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 selects the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern shown in FIG. 38 (B) (step Sf6). ..
Here, the continuous winning notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the AT continuous lottery process has been executed and the number of additional games has been given (whether or not the AT continuous winning has been performed). Further, the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern is an effect pattern that destroys a number that is not common with the predetermined number of additional games when the predetermined number and the number of additional games have a common number. It is an effect that changes to the number of games to be added and informs whether or not the AT is continuously won. In addition, although the continuous winning notification effect of each pattern of the present embodiment is the continuous effect executed by the end of one game, it may be the continuous effect executed over a plurality of games.

  As shown in FIG. 38B, in the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern of the present embodiment, for example, the number notification effect 502 for displaying the image of the character string “TOTAL + 100” is the liquid crystal display 51. After that, the partial destruction effect 503 in which the character string of "0 sheets" of "TOTAL +100 sheets" is overwritten with the image of the explosion is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and then the character string of "+10" is left. It is a continuous production in which the liquid crystal display 51 displays the additional notification effect 504 in which the other character strings are changed to display the image of the additional character string "Additional + 10G". In addition, in the addition notification effect 504 of the present embodiment, the other character strings are changed without moving the character string of “+10”, but the other character strings are changed while moving the character string of “+10”. May be. Although illustration is omitted, the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern of the present embodiment is also a case where the AT continuous lottery is not won, that is, when the number of additional games is ± 0 games, After displaying the partial destruction effect in which the character string of "+10" of "TOTAL +100 sheets" is overwritten with the image of the explosion on the liquid crystal display 51, the image of the character string such as "Additional ± 0G! The additional notification effect displayed on the display 51 is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 37, when there is no number common to the number of additional games and the predetermined number (step Sf5; No), the sub-control unit 91 selects the continuous winning notification effect of the all destruction pattern shown in FIG. 38 (C). (Step Sf7). Here, the continuous winning notification effect of the all destruction pattern means that when there is no common number between the predetermined number and the number of additional games, the predetermined pattern is changed to the number of additional games in the effect pattern that destroys all the predetermined number of numbers. This is an effect to let the AT know whether or not he or she has been continuously won. In the continuous winning notification effect of the all destruction pattern of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38C, for example, after the number notification effect 502 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, all the character strings are displayed as an explosion image. After the overwritten destruction effect 505 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 51, the character string is changed and an image of the character string “Additional + 5G” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 51. is there.

  Returning to FIG. 37, when the number of medals acquired after the selection of the continuous winning notification effect or after the start of AT has not reached the predetermined number (step Sf4; No), the sub-control unit 91 causes the role of cherry or watermelon. It is determined whether or not the AT continuous lottery process is executed due to the internal winning in (2) and the AT continuous winning is performed (step Sf8). The sub-control unit 91 terminates the processing when the AT winning combination is not continuously selected for the cherry role or the watermelon winning combination (step Sf8; No), and the AT winning combination is selected for the cherry role or watermelon winning combination (step Sf8; Yes), the continuous winning notification effect 507 after completion of all effects shown in FIG. 38D is selected, and the process is ended.

  Here, the continuous winning notification effect 507 after the completion of all the effects is an effect that notifies the AT that the winning combination of the cherry or watermelon is executed at the end of all the effects after one game is continuously won. . As shown in FIG. 38 (D), the continuous winning notification effect 507 after the completion of all the effects of the present embodiment is, for example, an image of a character string of “additional + 10G” when the AT is continuously won by the winning of the cherry combination. And an image of cherry are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Next, specific control of the slot machine 1 according to Modification 3 will be described.

  In the AT state, when you internally win the role of cherry or watermelon, or when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT reaches a predetermined number (100, 250, 500, 1000, ...), the sub control The unit 91 executes the AT lottery process using the continuous lottery table. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 executes the number notification effect 501 shown in FIG. 38A to notify the number of medals to be acquired after the AT starts, and when the number of medals to be acquired reaches a predetermined number, the continuous winning notification effect is effected. Is executed to notify the number of games to be added and the AT continuous winning is notified. Here, when there is a common number between the predetermined number and the number of additional games, the sub control unit 91 executes the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern shown in FIG. 38B, and the predetermined number and the additional number of games. When there is no common number between and, the continuous winning notification effect of the all destruction pattern shown in FIG. 38 (C) is executed. Then, the sub-control unit 91, regardless of whether or not the number of medals to be acquired is the predetermined number, when the AT is continuously won by the internal winning of the role of cherry or watermelon, at the end of all the effects shown in FIG. ) The continuous winning notification production 507 after the completion of all the productions is executed to notify that the number of games has been added by continuously winning the AT by winning the role of cherry or watermelon.

  Then, in the modified example 3 configured as described above, the counting of the net increase of medals is configured to end when a predetermined period (for example, 50 games) has elapsed after the AT ends. Then, the net increase in the number of medals reaches a predetermined number (corresponding to the specified number in the above embodiment), and the net increase is notified by a notification effect (display of "+100!" In FIGS. 38 (A) and (B)). After that, when the net increase in medals decreases and the net increase in medals again reaches a predetermined number, execution of the notification effect is restricted. As a result, the net increase is reduced after the AT ends, and the net increase is again below the specified number, but before the number of games after the AT reaches 50 games, the AT is controlled again and the net increase is again the specified number. It is possible to prevent the player from making an impression that the number of medals has decreased after the AT has ended, such as when reaching AT.

  In Modification 3, when the net number of medals reaches a predetermined number, a notification effect (display of "+100!" In FIGS. 38 (A) and (B)) and a continuous notification corresponding to the specific effect. It is also possible to configure such that the effects are not overlapped uniformly, the continuous notification effect is executed without executing the notification effect, and the notification effect is executed when the payout of medals occurs thereafter. As a result, even if the execution timing of the notification effect is changed, the flow in which the notification effect is executed when the payout of medals occurs is not broken, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling discomfort. You can

  In Modification 3, when the net number of medals reaches a predetermined number, a notification effect (display of "+100!" In FIGS. 38 (A) and (B)) and a continuous notification corresponding to the specific effect. It is also possible that the effects are not uniformly duplicated, the notification effect is executed without executing the continuous notification effect, and then the continuous notification effect is executed when the net increase reaches a predetermined number. As a result, even if the execution timing of the continuous notification effect is changed, the flow of the continuous notification effect being executed when the net increase number reaches the predetermined number is not broken, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Can proceed.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the modified example 3, the sub-control unit 91 executes the number notification effect 501 for notifying the number of medals acquired after the AT starts, as shown in FIG. 38 (A). To do. Then, the sub-control unit 91 executes the AT continuous lottery process when the number of medals acquired after the AT starts reaches a predetermined number, and also informs whether or not the number of additional games has been awarded by continuously winning the AT. The continuous winning notification effect is executed. At this time, in the third modification, the sub-control unit 91, as shown in FIGS. 38 (B) and 38 (C), the addition notification effect 504 that notifies the number of additional games from the number notification effect 502 that notifies the predetermined number. , 506 is executed as a continuous winning notification effect.

  By doing this, the AT continuous lottery is performed not only when winning the role of cherry or watermelon, but also when the number of medals acquired after AT starts reaches the predetermined number, so winning the role of cherry or watermelon It is possible to increase the possibility that the AT continuous lottery will be performed than the slot machine that only performs the AT continuous lottery only at the time, and the AT is continued even if the player does not win the role of cherry or watermelon with a low winning rate. Since you can hold expectations, the interest in playing games will improve. Further, the slot machine 1 of the modified example 3 has a relationship between the number of medals and the number of additional games to be played, as compared to the slot machine which does not notify the number of additional games in the effect pattern in which the number notification effect is changed to the continuous winning notification effect. Since it becomes easier for the person to recognize, the fact that the number of medals acquired after the start of AT has reached a predetermined number can effectively inform that the AT has been continuously won.

  In particular, according to the slot machine 1 of the modified example 3, the number of medals obtained after the start of AT as an advantageous event obtained by the player, that is, the net increase in medals, is a determination target of whether or not to perform the AT continuous lottery. Is becoming

  By doing so, not only the player can be satisfied with the game by increasing the number of medals acquired after the start of AT, but also by adding a predetermined number of medals to the game to be added. It is possible to expect that the number of medals will be increased due to the number of medals, so I became more interested in the number of medals after the start of AT and won the medals after the start of AT. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game as compared with the slot machine in which the AT continuous lottery process is not executed even when the number of sheets reaches the predetermined number.

  In the third modification, whether or not to perform the AT continuous lottery is determined as the medal net increase number after the AT is started, but it may be another event as long as it is an advantageous event obtained by the player. For example, the determination target whether or not to perform the AT continuous lottery may be the number of medals to be paid out after the AT is started. Further, for example, the longer the period of the AT state is, the more advantageous it is to the player, and the degree of satisfaction with the game can be obtained. Therefore, the digestion game after the start of the AT is the target of determination as to whether or not to perform the AT continuous lottery. The number, the number of digested navigation stocks, and the number of digested navigations (number of executions of navigation production) may be used. Here, the navigation stock refers to the amount (the number of sets) that can be controlled by the AT due to its large number. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navistock by 1, the AT is controlled while the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 40), and the navi effect can be executed during that time. Therefore, the larger the determined number of navigation stocks, the more controlled the AT is for a long period of time, and the higher the degree of advantage for the player. In addition, when the determination target is the number of digested navigation stocks, for example, when digesting the navigation stocks a predetermined number of times, it is determined whether or not new navigation stocks are given at a rate of 50% to continue AT. Is possible. Further, when the determination target is the number of digest navigations, for example, in a configuration in which the number of times that the navigation effect can be executed is given 20 times when the AT is won, a new navigation effect is provided at a rate of 50% after the execution of the navigation effect for a predetermined number of times. A configuration is conceivable in which it is determined whether or not the AT is continued by giving the number of times of execution of.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the modified example 3, when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT reaches a predetermined number, when the predetermined number and the number of additional games have a common number, the sub-control unit 91 determines. 38B, the partial winning pattern continuous winning notification effect is executed, and a part of the image (“+10” image) of the common character string between the number notification effect 502 and the addition notification effect 504 is left. The destruction effect 503 is executed.

  By doing so, it is easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the number of medals acquired reaching the predetermined number and the number of additional games than the slot machine which does not execute the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern. can do.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the modification 3, the sub-control unit 91 wins the role of cherry or watermelon in a game to which the number of additional games is given when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT reaches a predetermined number. Also, when the number of games to be added is given, the continuous winning notification effect 507 shown in FIG. 38D is executed after the continuous winning notification effect is executed.

  By doing this, the number of games to be added is increased because the number of medals acquired after AT start reaches a predetermined number compared to the slot machine that does not execute the continuous winning notification effect after executing the continuous winning notification effect after executing the continuous winning notification effect. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player cannot recognize that the privilege has been awarded by winning the role of cherry or the role of watermelon in the game to which is given.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the modified example 3, the sub-control unit 91 gives the number of additional games for continuing the AT when the number of medals acquired after the AT starts reaches a predetermined number during the AT control. Decide whether to be done.

  By doing so, the player becomes more interested in the number of medals obtained after the start of AT than the slot machine which does not give the number of additional games due to the predetermined number of medals obtained after the start of AT. , The interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of Modification 3, the sub-control unit 91 sets a plurality of predetermined numbers, such as 100, 250, .... Then, in the RT3 state during AT control, the average number of medals acquired does not change. For this reason, the average number of games from 0 to 100 after the AT is started and after shifting to the RT3 state is ⅔ times the average number of games from 100 to 250 (100). / 150 = 2/3 [times]). In addition to the average number of games, for example, the average number of times of push-order bell navigation from 0 to 100 sheets is 2/3 times the average number of times of push-order bell navigation from 100 to 250 sheets. .. As a result, the expected value (average number of games, average number of times of navigation, etc.) until the number of medals acquired after the AT reaches the first predetermined number (100) reaches the next predetermined number (250). It is 1.5 times the expected value up to. Then, in the present embodiment, the expected value until reaching the first predetermined number is the highest, and the expected value until reaching the predetermined number as the predetermined number increases to 250, 500, 1000, ... Is set to be low.

  By doing this, when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT reaches 100, it is more than when the number of medals acquired reaches 100 to 250, 250 to 500, or 500 to 1000. The AT number is reached in a short period and the AT continuous lottery is conducted. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the smaller the predetermined number is, the easier it is to reach the predetermined number, and the more the number of games to be added is more likely to be given. It can be expected that the number of games will be given. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it becomes difficult for the slot machine 1 to reach the predetermined number as the predetermined number increases. Can be prevented.

  Particularly, according to the slot machine 1 of Modification 3, the sub-control unit 91 acquires 100 coins so that when the number of acquired medals after the start of AT reaches 100, the number of additional games is always +5 or more. The continuous lottery table at the time is preset. Further, in the present embodiment, the average net increase in medals per game in the RT0 to RT3 states in the AT state is 2 or more, and the number of games awarded when winning the AT is 50 games after the transition to the RT3 state. Since it is set in advance, the probability that the number of medals to be acquired after the start of AT will be 100 is set to be high.

  By doing so, the player can expect that the number of medals acquired after the start of AT will be 100, the number of additional games will be given, and AT will be continued, so that the medals after the start of AT The enjoyment of the game is improved as compared to the slot machine in which the number of acquired cards is unlikely to be 100, or the slot machine in which the number of additional games is not given even when 100 is reached.

  In Modification 3, the number of medals acquired after the start of AT may not reach 100, and AT is not always continued. However, 100 is definitely reached and the number of games to be added is surely increased. May be added so that the AT is continued. For example, the sub-control unit 91 may control not to set the number of games at the time of winning the AT but to continue the AT until the number of medals acquired after the start of the AT reaches 100. In addition, for example, when the AT is won, by setting conditions such as "the number of remaining games is 0 and the net medal increase is 100 or more" as the AT end condition, the number of medals acquired after the start of AT is surely 100. You may control to AT until it becomes. In this case, when the number of remaining games becomes 0, it is necessary to control the sub control unit 91 so that the AT can be continued unless the net medal increase number reaches 100. By doing this, the player can be confident that the number of medals acquired will be 100 when the AT is started, the number of additional games will be added, and the AT will be continued, so that the AT is won. Even more entertaining game than slot machines which may not be extended.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the modified example 3, the RT0 to 3 states are set to the advantageous RT, and the AT in the RT3 state is more advantageous to the player than the AT in the normal state / RT1 state / RT4 state. As a result, the average net increase in medals is set to be high. Then, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not to count the number of medals acquired after AT start and to add the number of additional games regardless of the game state (normal state / RT1 to RT3 state, SB state). . Further, the sub-control unit 91 is set so that the number of remaining games in the AT game number counter is not exhausted until the state shifts to the RT0 to 3 states, and the normal state, the RT1 state, and the RT4 state until the state shifts to the RT0 to 3 states. Even in the state, the average net increase in medals is set to 1 or more if controlled by the AT.

  By doing so, if the AT is controlled even in the normal state, the RT1 state, and the RT4 state until the transition to the RT0 to 3 states, the remaining number of games of the AT is not exhausted and the number of medals acquired increases (net increase). Therefore, the number of medals to be acquired after the start of AT is more likely to reach the predetermined number than the slot machine in which the number of medals to be acquired is not counted for ATs in the normal state, RT1 state or RT4 state in which medals can be net increased, and the number of games to be added is increased. It is easy to give the game, and the player can expect that the number of games to be added is given, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Modification 4]
Next, a modified example 3 of the first to third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44. In the modified example 4, the timing at which the insertion (credit) / settlement is allowed after the replay winning is made when the automatic BET by the replay winning is completed, or when the automatic BET by the replay winning is started (or started). ..

  Also in the first embodiment to the third embodiment, when the various replays win the prize, the timing of the throwing in and the settlement is made the same as that of the modification 4, and thus the modification 4 to the first to the third embodiment. Can be applied and implemented. Specific processing will be described below for the modified example 4, but detailed description of the same parts as those in the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

[BET processing]
First, the BET processing executed by the main control unit 41 in Sd1 of the game processing shown in FIG. 7 will be described. 39 to 41 are flowcharts showing the control content of the BET processing executed by the main control unit.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the bet number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 is cleared (S10), and the specified number (the upper limit number in the present embodiment) according to the gaming state is cleared. The same as the above. 3 in any game state is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 (S11), and whether or not the replay game flag indicating the replay game is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. Based on, it is determined whether or not the next game (game to be started now) is a replay game (S12).

  When it is determined in S12 that the next game (the game to be started from now) is a replay game, a lip freeze process for generating a lip freeze at the time of winning the bell lip is executed (S13). The lip freeze process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the lip-freeze process is completed, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 in S14, and the specified number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is referred to. It is determined whether or not 3), that is, whether or not the bet number which is a condition for starting the game is set (S15), and if the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the process returns to S14. When the value of the BET counter reaches the specified number and the setting of the bet number by the replay winning is completed, the process proceeds to S16. After the value of the BET counter is added, the main control unit 41 executes a process of sequentially lighting the 1BETLED 14, the 2BETLED 15, and the 3BETLED 16 according to the value of the BET counter. In addition, the main control unit 41 executes a process of turning on the replaying LED 20 and the start valid LED 18 (the waiting LED 19 during the wait) after the setting of the number of bets after the replay winning is completed.

  In S16, it is determined whether or not the replays won in the previous game were the normal rep, the 7-repeat rep, and the 7-fake rips 1 to 5 (these replays are collectively referred to as the first replay hereinafter). .. Note that the first replay may be only a normal replay among replays composed of only the same symbol. Whether or not it was the first replay is specified from the set replay game flag. When it is determined in S16 that the replay is the first replay, the bet number is added by 3 in S17 (because the replay winning state is three bets), and the BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91. A BET command indicating that there is a BET sound ("BET command (with BET sound)" for convenience in S17. The same applies hereinafter) is set in the normal command transmission buffer.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S16 that the bet number is not the first replay, the BET command indicating that the bet number is increased by 3 in S18 and that the BET tone is not output by the sub control unit 91 (S18 For the sake of convenience, “BET command (without BET sound)” is shown. The same applies hereinafter) is set in the normal command transmission buffer. When it is determined that it was not the first replay, when the first replay is the normal lip, the 7-repeat lip, and the 7-fake lip 1-5, it is determined that the bell lip 1-5 is won. When it was done. Hereinafter, replays other than the first replay are also referred to as second replays, and Bell Reps 1 to 5 correspond here. In addition, the second replay may include 7 fakes 1 to 5 composed of a combination of symbols including different symbols, and may also include 7 sets of lip as an AT lottery trigger described later. Good.

  The BET command set in S17 and S18 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). As a result, the sub-control unit 91 outputs the BET sound each time the bet number is set after the first replay winning, whereas the bet number is set after the second replay winning. Will not output the BET sound. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily notice the first replay prize, while making it difficult for the player to notice the second replay prize.

  In S19, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter, which is the value of the credit stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41, is 50, which is the upper limit value. When it is determined in S19 that the value is the upper limit value, the closing prohibition flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 (S20), and the process proceeds to S22. When the closing prohibition flag is set in S20, processing for turning off the closing request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 is performed. When the BET counter is set to the specified number by the second replay winning, the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are not turned off in S20, and for example, YES is determined in S37 described later or the lip freeze ends. After that, or after the credit command (with BET sound) corresponding to 3 BETs is output, the closing request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are turned off.

  When it is determined in S19 that it is not the upper limit value, that is, when it is determined that credit can be inserted, the process proceeds to S21. When it is determined in S12 that the game is not a replay game, the process directly proceeds to S21.

  In S21, the setting before the waiting for insertion is performed, and the process proceeds to S22. In the setting before the insertion wait, if the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41, the insertion prohibition flag is cleared and the medal can be inserted. Therefore, after the replay winning, the medals thrown in before the completion of the setting of the bet number and the setting before the waiting for insertion have not been made yet are accepted, and the setting of the bet number is completed After the waiting setting is made, the inserted medals are effectively accepted and credits are added. The main control unit 41 lights the throw-in request LED 17 after the setting before the throw-in is performed and clears the throw-in prohibition flag in S21, and when the bet number can be set, the BET switch valid LED 21 is set. Execute the process of lighting. When the BET counter is set to the specified number by the first replay winning, only the insertion request LED 17 is turned on in S21. Further, when the BET counter is set to the prescribed number by the second replay winning, the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are turned on in S21, and, for example, after YES is determined in S37 described later or after the lip freeze ends. Alternatively, after the credit command (with BET sound) corresponding to 3BET is output, the closing request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are turned off.

  In S22, it is determined whether or not the medal can be inserted, based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. If it is determined in S22 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal flow path is set to the hopper tank side path so that the medal can be inserted ( When it is determined in S23) and S25 that medals cannot be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout opening 9 side for a new medal. Is prohibited (S24), and the process proceeds to S25.

  In S25, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is on, and if the setting key switch 37 is on, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (S26). If the value of the BET counter is 0 in S26, the confirmation start command is set in the normal command transmission buffer (S27), and the setting confirmation process (S28), that is, the setting confirmation state is entered. The confirmation start command set in S27 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). Further, after the setting confirmation process in S28 is completed, the process returns to S22. If the setting key switch 37 is not on in S25 or the value of the BET counter is not 0 in S26, the process proceeds to S30.

  In S30, it is determined whether or not the detection result by the inserted medal sensor 31 becomes a proper detection result and the passage of the inserted medal is detected, that is, the presence or absence of the inserted medal flag indicating that the passage of the inserted medal is detected. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in S30, the process proceeds to S45. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the inserted medal flag is cleared (S31), and the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. It is determined whether or not medals can be inserted based on whether or not the medals can be inserted (S32). If not, the process proceeds to S45.

  If it is possible to insert medals in S32, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (S33). If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, a BET command (with BET sound) indicating that the bet number is incremented by 1 and that the BET sound is output by the sub control unit 91 is sent as a normal command. The credit buffer is set (S34), the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (S35), and the process returns to S22. The BET command set in S34 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). As a result, when the number of bets is set by inserting medals, the BET sound is output on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in S33, it is determined in S36 whether or not the second replay was won in the previous game. Whether or not it was the second replay is specified from the replay game flag. When it is determined in S36 that the second replay has not been won in the previous game, in S38, a credit command indicating the value of the credit counter after adding 1 and indicating that the sub control unit 91 outputs a credit sound. (In S38, for convenience, it is shown as "credit command (normal)". The same applies hereinafter) is set in the normal command transmission buffer, and the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM of the main control unit 41 in S40. Is incremented by 1. The credit command set in S38 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  When it is determined in S36 that the second replay was won in the previous game, it is determined in S37 whether or not the specified number of BET sounds have been output. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the credit command shown in S39 has been output three times for the specified number. When the number of bets is set after the second replay winning, the BET command (no BET sound) is output as shown in S18, so that the BET sound is not output in the sub control unit 91. Therefore, after the second replay winning, after the number of bets is set, when the medals are inserted and credited, a process for outputting the BET sound up to a prescribed number of times is performed.

  In S37, when the specified number of BET sounds are not output, in S39, a credit command indicating the value of the credit counter after adding 1 and outputting the credit sound by the sub control unit 91 (in S39, for convenience, "Credit command (with BET sound). The same applies hereinafter) is set in the normal command transmission buffer, and the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is incremented by 1 in S40. To do. The credit command set in S39 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). On the other hand, in S37, when the specified number of BET sounds have already been output, the process proceeds to S38, and the credit command (normal) is set in the normal command transmission buffer. As a result, when credits are added by inserting medals after the second replay, the BET sound is output up to the third sheet and the credit sound is output for the fourth and subsequent sheets on the sub-control unit 91 side. It On the other hand, when credits are added by inserting medals when not after the second replay winning, the sub controller 91 outputs the credit sound from the first sheet. As a step next to S36 and S37, after executing S40, the corresponding process of S38 or S39 is performed, so that the credit command indicating the current value after addition by S40 as the value of the credit counter is displayed in S38. Alternatively, it may be set in S39. Further, since the specified number of bets is set after the release of the lip freeze during the second replay winning, in S39, a command for outputting the specified number of BET sounds is issued as a credit command (with a BET sound). You may make it set and output the bet sound for a prescribed number.

  In S41, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to S22. If the value of the credit counter is 50, the disallowance flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 in S42 and the process returns to S22.

  In S45, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, whether or not the rising edge indicating the rising of the start switch 7 is set. Further, the rising edge is set only when any of the switches is turned ON and all of the switches are turned OFF. It is also determined whether or not the switch is OFF.

  If it is determined in S45 that the operation of the start switch 7 has not been detected, or if the start switch 7 has been operated but other switches are also operated, the operation proceeds to S50 and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid. If it is detected, the process proceeds to S46 and the rising edge is cleared. Further, in S47, the bet number specified in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is referred to, and whether the value of the BET counter is the specified number, that is, whether or not the bet number which is the condition for starting the game is set. To determine.

  If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number in S47, the process returns to S22, and if the value of the BET counter is the specified number, the closing prohibition flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 and the flow path switching solenoid is set in S48. 30 is turned off, and a new medal is prohibited by using the medal flow path as a path on the medal payout opening 9 side, and in S49, the setting at the start of the game is performed. As a result, even if a medal is inserted, it is not accepted until the game is finished after the game is started and the setting before the insertion wait is performed in S21 in the BET processing of the next game and thereafter, and the medal payout port 9 Will be paid out from. Then, after S49, the BET process is ended and the process proceeds to Sd2 in FIG.

  In S50, it is determined whether or not the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5 is detected, that is, whether or not the rising edge indicating the rising of the one-sheet BET switch 5 is set. If the operation of the 1-sheet BET switch 5 is not detected in S50, the procedure proceeds to S51. If the operation of the 1-sheet BET switch 5 is detected, the procedure proceeds to S65 in FIG. 41 to clear the rising edge.

  In S66, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the specified number by referring to the specified number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in S66, the process returns to S22, and if the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined in S67 whether the value of the credit counter is 0 or not. If the value of the credit counter is 0 in S67, the process returns to S22. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in S67, the BET command indicating that the bet number is incremented by 1 in S68 and the BET sound is output by the sub control unit 91 (there is a BET sound) Is set in the normal command transmission buffer. Further, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 in S69, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 in S70, and the process returns to S22. The BET command set in S68 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). Thus, when the bet number is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5, a BET sound is output on the sub-control unit 91 side. After the second replay winning, when YES is determined in S66, the same determination as in S37 is performed, and when the specified number of BET sounds are not output, the same processing as S39 is performed. , BET sound may be output.

  In S51, it is determined whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, that is, whether or not the rising edge indicating the rising of the MAXBET switch 6 is set. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in S51, the process proceeds to S52, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the process proceeds to S75 in FIG. 41 to clear the rising edge.

  In S76, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the specified number by referring to the specified number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in S76, the process proceeds to S80, and if the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined in S77 whether the value of the credit counter is 0 or not. If the value of the credit counter is 0 in S77, the process proceeds to S80. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in S77, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 in S78, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 in S79, and the process returns to S76.

  In S80, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has been added. If the BET counter has not been added, the process returns to S22. When the BET counter in S80 is incremented, not only the increment in S79 but also the increment in S14 after the lip freeze is canceled by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 are included. On the other hand, if the BET counter has been added, the BET command indicating that the bet number has been added by the number added in S81 and that the BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91 (BET command (BET sound) Yes) is set in the normal command transmission buffer, and the process proceeds to S22. The BET command set in S81 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). As a result, when the bet number is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6, the BET sound corresponding to the set bet number is output on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  In S52, it is determined whether the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, that is, whether the rising edge indicating the rising of the settlement switch 10 is set. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in S52, the process returns to S22, and if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the process proceeds to S53 to clear the rising edge. In S54, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41.

  If it is not determined in S54 that the game is a replay game, it is determined in S56 whether the value of the BET counter is 0. If the value of the BET counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S57, the hopper motor 34 is driven, and the BET counter is driven. The control for paying out the medals corresponding to the value stored in (that is, the control for returning the medals used to set the bet number and setting the value of the BET counter to 0) is performed, and the start of the payout of the medals and the bet number adjustment The bet amount adjustment processing for setting the payout start command for notifying in the normal command transmission buffer is performed. After the bet number settlement process in S57, the throw-in prohibition flag set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is cleared in S58, and the process returns to S22. As a result, when the bet number is settled by operating the settlement switch 10 in a state where the bet number is set, not after the replay winning, the sub-control unit 91 displays that the bet number is being settled. At the same time, the sound corresponding to the bet number adjustment is output.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S54 that the game is a replay game, or when it is determined in S56 that the value of the BET counter is 0, in S59, the value stored in the credit counter by driving the hopper motor 34 is driven. The control for paying out the medals (that is, the control for returning the medals stored as credits and setting the value of the credit counter to 0) is performed, the start of the payout of the medals is notified, and the credit settlement in the replay game is performed. A bet number adjustment process is performed to set a payout start command in the normal command transmission buffer for notifying whether or not there is a credit adjustment when the bet number is not set. After the bet number settlement process in S57, the throw-in prohibition flag set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is cleared in S58, and the process returns to S22. As a result, when the replay prize is settled by operating the settlement switch 10, the bet number is not settled, and only the credit settlement is made. The fact that the payment is being made is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the credit payment after the replay winning is output. Further, when the settlement is performed by operating the settlement switch 10 when the value of the BET counter is 0, the sub controller 91 side indicates that the credit settlement is being performed when the value of the BET counter is 0. Along with being displayed, a sound corresponding to credit settlement when the value of the BET counter is 0 is output.

[Lip freeze processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the lip freeze process executed by the main controller 41 in S13 of the BET process. The lip freeze process is performed when it is determined that the game is a replay game, that is, after the replay winning in the previous game. In S85, it is determined whether or not the replay that won in the previous game was the second replay of Bell Reps 1 to 5. If it is determined that the bell rep 1 to 5 are not satisfied, the lip freeze processing is directly terminated without causing freeze.

  On the other hand, when it is determined to be one of the bell rep 1 to 5, it is determined YES in any of S89 to S92, and the bet number setting timing by the replay winning and the start switch 7 are set until the freeze cancellation condition is satisfied. A process for generating a freeze (lip freeze) that delays the timing of validating is performed. In S86, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50, which is the upper limit value. When it is determined in S86 that it is not the upper limit value, credits can be added. Therefore, in S87, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal flow path can be used with the flow path of the medal as the hopper tank side path. Stated. Further, in S88, a process for causing the player to turn on the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 is performed. As a result, it is possible to particularly promote the MAXBET operation and the insertion of medals.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S86 that the value of the credit counter is 50, which is the upper limit value, since credit addition is impossible, the processing proceeds to S89 without performing the processing of S87 and the like. As a result, even if the credit counter is 50, it is possible to prevent the inserted medal from flowing down to the hopper tank side, and to prevent a problem that the credit is not added and the bet number is not added by the medal. You can

  In S89, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of lip freeze. When it is determined in S89 that the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the lip freeze, the lip freeze cancel condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in S89 that the predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of the Lip Freeze, it is determined in S90 whether or not the player has performed a MAXBET operation using the MAXBET switch 6. When it is determined in S90 that the player has performed a MAXBET operation, the lip freeze cancel condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in S90 that there is no MAXBET operation by the player, in S91, the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 are provided in the inserted medal sensor 31 arranged on the hopper tank 34a side of the flow path switching solenoid 30. It is determined whether or not the sensor arranged on the most upstream side of the plurality of sensors (that is, the sensor capable of first detecting the inserted medal (this sensor is also referred to as a specific sensor below)) is detected. The passage of the medal is detected by the specific sensor when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on in S87. When it is determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, the lip freeze cancel condition is satisfied. Even when it is determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, another sensor has not detected the insertion of the medal, and the detection result of the insertion medal sensor 31 is not an appropriate detection result. No flag is set.

  If it is not determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, it is determined in S92 whether or not the player has performed a credit settlement operation using the settlement switch 10. When it is determined in S92 that the player has performed the credit settlement operation, the lip freeze cancel condition is satisfied. Further, after the freeze is released by the credit settlement operation, YES is determined in S52 of FIG. 40 and the process proceeds to S59, so that the credit settlement process is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S92 that the player does not perform the credit settlement operation, the process proceeds to S89.

  After the freeze releasing condition is satisfied, in S93, when the flow passage switching solenoid 30 is in the on state, the flow passage switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the lip freeze processing is ended. In the lip freeze process, the process of S93 is performed. As a result, for example, even if a rip freeze occurs when the credit counter is 49 and a plurality of medals are thrown in at a stretch, the first sensor is detected by the specific sensor and the freeze release condition is satisfied. Immediately after that, in S93, the flow path switching solenoid is turned off to end the lip freeze processing, and then the first medal is detected by another sensor and the detection result by the inserted medal sensor 31 is appropriate. When the detection result is set and the inserted medal flag is set, YES is determined in S30 of FIG. 40, the credit counter is updated to 50 in S40, YES is determined in S19 of FIG. 39, and the insertion impossible flag is set in S20. Since the flow path switching solenoid is turned off, the second and subsequent medals among the plurality of medals are not It is discharged from Le payout opening 9. The plurality of sensors included in the inserted medal sensor 31 detect the result of the inserted medal sensor 31 when the first medal is detected by the specific sensor and then by another sensor when a plurality of medals are inserted at once. The time required to obtain an appropriate detection result is shorter than the time required from the detection of the first medal by the specific sensor to the second medal reaching the flow path switching solenoid 30. Are arranged as follows. Therefore, when the credit 50 is reached by inserting the first medal, the flow path switching solenoid is always turned off when the second and subsequent medals reach the flow path switching solenoid 30, The medals after the eyes can be paid out from the medal payout exit 9. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the credit is not added and returned even though the medal is inserted.

  On the other hand, when the freeze counter occurs when the credit counter is less than 49 and a plurality of medals are thrown in at a stretch, the first sensor is detected by the specific sensor and the freeze release condition is satisfied. Immediately after that, the flow path switching solenoid is immediately turned off in S93, but immediately after that, it is determined to be NO in S19 and the setting before the insertion waiting is performed in S21 and the flow path switching solenoid is turned on. Since it is switched and the on state is maintained until the credit 50 is reached, the second and subsequent medals of the plurality of medals are also taken in (until the credit 50 is reached) and added to the credit. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience when a medal is inserted during the Lip Freeze.

[An example of the timing when the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed]
Next, description will be made regarding the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the end of the game. 43 (a) to 43 (d) are views for explaining an example of a timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the end of the game by executing the BET process shown in FIGS. 39 to 41. Is.

  FIG. 43A is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the small winning combination has not been won and the medals have not been paid out. If the small winning combination has not occurred, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the process of S8 of FIG. 11 and the process of S1 for the next game, and of S10 to S12 of FIG. After the processing is executed, the processing after S21 is executed, so that the insertion or settlement of medals is permitted as shown in FIG. 43 (a).

  FIG. 43 (b) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the small winning combination has been won and the medals have been paid out. If a small winning combination has occurred, the game ends after the payout is made, and thereafter, the process of S8 of FIG. 11 and the process of S1 for the next game, and of S10 to S12 of FIG. After the processing is executed, the processing after S21 is executed, so that the insertion or settlement of medals is permitted as shown in FIG. 43 (b).

  FIG. 43 (c) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the normal rip winning. When a normal rep winning is occurring, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the process of S8 of FIG. 11 and the process of S1 for the next game, and of S10 to S12 of FIG. In addition to the processing, after the bet number setting is further completed and it is determined in S19 that the credit is possible, the processing of S21 and the subsequent steps is executed, as shown in FIG. 43 (c). It is allowed to insert or settle medals.

  FIG. 43 (d) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the Bell Lip prize has been won. When the bell lip prize is generated, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the process of S8 of FIG. 11, the process of S1 for the next game, and the processes of S10 to S12 of FIG. 39. 42 is executed, the lip freeze process shown in FIG. 42 is executed, and the lip freeze control is performed until the lip freeze cancel condition is satisfied. In the meantime, as shown in S87 of FIG. 42, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on to permit the insertion of medals for releasing the freeze, and the credit settlement operation and the MAXBET operation for releasing the freeze. Is also allowed. When the lip-freeze cancellation condition is satisfied, after the bet number setting is completed, it is determined in S19 of FIG. 39 that credit is possible, and then the processing of S21 and subsequent steps is executed, so that the processing shown in FIG. 43 (d) is performed. Thus, the insertion or settlement of ordinary medals is allowed.

  During the rip freeze, the insertion of medals for clearing the freeze and the credit settlement operation are allowed. Is charged or settled. Note that even during the lip freeze, when the value of the credit counter has already reached 50, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is not turned on in S87 of FIG. 42. It will be allowed later.

[Allowable timing of injection and settlement after replay winning]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 (c) and 43 (d), the timing at which the insertion (credit) / settlement is allowed after the replay winning is the time when the automatic BET by the replay winning is completed. However, the timing at which the insertion (credit) and settlement after the replay winning is permitted is not limited to this, and may be when the automatic BET by the replay winning is started (or started).

[Modified example of the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed]
FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the replay prize has been won. In FIG. 44 (a), when a normal rep winning is occurring, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the process of S8 of FIG. 11 and the process of S1 for the next game, After the processing of S10 to S13 of FIG. 39 is performed, the processing of automatic BET (S14, S15) is started. That is, since the start of the automatic BET processing (S14, S15) is confirmed after the processing of S10 to S13 of FIG. 39, it can be said that the automatic BET processing is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), when the automatic BET process is started (or started), the insertion or settlement of medals may be permitted.

  As a first example, for example, when YES is determined in S12 and the process of S13 is completed, after performing the same process as S19 and determining whether the value of the credit counter is 50, The automatic BET processing (processing similar to S14 and S15) is started, and after it is determined that the value of the credit counter is not 50, completion of the automatic BET processing started thereafter is waited for. Alternatively, credits may be added when a medal that is inserted after the processing similar to S21 is detected and credits are settled when an operation to the settlement switch 10 is detected. On the other hand, after performing the same processing as S19 and determining that the value of the credit counter is 50, the same processing as the processing after S20 may be performed. In the first example, the lip freeze process may be performed at the timing when the bet number setting is started, for example.

  As a second example, for example, when it is determined that the interrupt process for inserting or setting up medals can be executed and the value of the credit counter in the first example is not 50, or the value of the credit counter is After it is determined that it is not 50, the interruption of the interruption processing is permitted during the period from the execution of the first processing corresponding to S14 to the start of the game, and the interruption processing is performed every predetermined period (2 msec). The insertion process may be executed to allow the insertion or settlement of medals when the automatic BET process is started (or started).

  Even with such a configuration, the number of bets for the replay prize is generated even if the medal is inserted after the replay prize has been generated and before the replay game is started (reel rotation start). When the medal is detected after the setting (automatic BET) is started, the credit can be added according to the detection of the medal. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the credit addition after the occurrence of the replay winning from being performed before the start of the bet number setting. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the replay prize is generated, without making the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, while maintaining the significance of the existence of replays, the function of replays, that is, giving a replay game (1 game) instead of paying out medals, is maintained, while credits are paid according to a settlement operation even after a replay prize is won. By allowing the payout, the convenience of the player after the replay winning can be further improved.

  FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the Bell Lip prize has been won. When the bell lip prize has been generated, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the process of S8 of FIG. 11, the process of S1 for the next game, and the processes of S10 to S12 of FIG. 39. 42 is performed, the lip freeze processing shown in FIG. 42 is executed, and the lip freeze control is performed until the lip freeze cancel condition is satisfied. In the meantime, as shown in S87 of FIG. 42, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on to permit the insertion of medals for releasing the freeze, and the credit settlement operation and the MAXBET operation for releasing the freeze. Is also allowed. When the lip freeze release condition is satisfied, the bet number setting is started, and at the same time, the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed as shown in FIG. 44 (b).

  As described above, in the case of winning the normal lip, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), when the automatic BET process is started (or started), the insertion or settlement of medals is permitted, and the bell lip is paid. If the player wins, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the bell lip freeze is generated, and after the freeze release condition is satisfied, when the automatic BET process is started (or started), the medal It may be allowed to be charged or settled. In this case, in order to prevent the notification that the BET has been placed and the notification that the credit has been added from being performed at the same time, when the automatic BET processing is started (or started), a medal is inserted or Although the payment is permitted, the notification that the credit is added by the insertion of the medal may be always performed after the notification that the automatic bet has been made. Further, in the above-described embodiment, similarly, the notification that credits are added by the medal inserted for canceling the lip freeze is always made after the notification that automatic bet has been made. Good.

  In addition, even if the timing at which the insertion (credit) is allowed after the replay winning is made when the automatic BET by the replay winning is started, the timing at which the settlement is allowed after the replay winning is automatically performed by the replay winning. The time may be when the BET is completed.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 (c) and (d) and FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), the timing at which the insertion (credit) and the settlement are allowed after the replay winning is Although the example at the time of starting or completing the automatic BET by the replay prize has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be the timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the start or the completion of the automatic BET by the replay prize. The predetermined condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time elapses or when a predetermined process ends. As an example in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the predetermined time elapses after the completion of the automatic BET by the replay winning, for example, the BET command (with the BET sound) set in S17 of FIG. 39 is output to the sub control unit 91, and When the average time required to complete the output of the third BET sound based on the command is time A, the condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is YES in step S15 and time A has elapsed. If the BET command (without BET sound) set in S18 of FIG. 39 is output to the sub-control unit 91 and received by the time B, The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the time B elapses after it is determined as YES in S15. After the determination in S15 is YES, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the process may shift to S21.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the type of replay, the normal replay of the first replay is a specific replay display result that is a specific combination, and the second replay bell lip is a non-specific replay display result that is a non-specific combination. Although the example in which the is provided is described, the type of replay is not limited to this, and a non-specific re-game display result is not provided and only a specific re-game display result is provided. Of course, on the contrary, the specific re-game display result may not be provided and only the non-specific re-game display result may be provided.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the injection after the replay prize is allowed is described regardless of the type of the replay, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the injection after the replay prize is allowed depending on the type of the replay. It may be configured to. For example, the insertion is not allowed after the first replay winning as the specific replay display result that is the specific combination, whereas only after the second replay winning as the non-specific replay display result that is the non-specific combination is allowed. The input may be allowed. That is, the insertion may be permitted only when it is difficult to notice that the re-play display result has been derived, and the convenience may be improved without causing the player to bother.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which settlement after replay winning is allowed regardless of the type of replay has been described, but not limited to this, settlement after replay winning is allowed depending on the type of replay. It may be configured to. For example, after the first replay winning as a specific replay display result which is a specific combination, settlement is not allowed, whereas only after the second replay winning as a non-specific replay display result which is a non-specific combination. Payment may be allowed. That is, the settlement may be allowed only when it is hard to notice that the re-play display result has been derived, and the convenience may be improved without causing the player to bother.

  Then, in the modified example 3 configured as described above, the counting of the net increase of medals is configured to end when a predetermined period (for example, 50 games) has elapsed after the AT ends. Then, when the net increase of medals reaches the specified number and the net increase is notified by the notification effect, the net increase of medals decreases thereafter, and when the net increase of medals reaches the predetermined number again, the notification effect is executed. Configure to regulate. As a result, the net increase is reduced after the AT ends, and the net increase is again below the specified number, but before the number of games after the AT reaches 50 games, the AT is controlled again and the net increase is again the specified number. It is possible to prevent the player from making an impression that the number of medals has decreased after the AT has ended, such as when reaching AT.

  In Modification 3, when the execution of the specific effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the specific effect is executed without executing the notification effect, and the notification effect is executed when the payout of medals occurs thereafter. It is also possible to configure as follows. As a result, even if the execution timing of the notification effect is changed, the flow in which the notification effect is executed when the payout of medals occurs is not broken, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling discomfort. You can

  In Modification 3, when the execution of the specific effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the notification effect is executed without executing the specific effect, and when the net increase reaches a predetermined number thereafter, the continuous notification effect is performed. Can also be configured to perform. As a result, even if the execution time of the specific effect is changed, the flow in which the specific effect is executed when the net increase number reaches the predetermined number does not collapse, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling discomfort. can do.

[Modification 5]
In Modification 5, a case will be described in which the slot machine 1 in the first to third embodiments is replaced with a pachinko gaming machine 700.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 700, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 32 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 700.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the pachinko gaming machine 700 is composed of an outer frame formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 700 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 702 that is provided in the game frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame that is openably and closably installed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components (excluding a game board 706 described later) that are attached to them. Is.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 702, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 703. On the upper surface of the hitting ball supply plate 703, a chance button 7111 that is operated when a specific effect is executed in the variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) is provided. The chance button 7111 corresponds to the effect switch 56 of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  Selection buttons 112A and 7112B that are operated when selecting various setting items and the like are provided on the front surface of the hitting ball supply plate 703 around the chance button 7111. The selection buttons 7112A and 7112B correspond to the stop switches 8L and 8R when displaying each screen of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  At the bottom of the hitting ball supply plate 703, there are a surplus ball receiving tray 704 for storing game balls as a game medium that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 703, and a ball hitting handle (operation knob) 705 for launching a hit ball (gaming ball). It is provided. A game board 706 (see FIG. 45) is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 702. The game board 706 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 706 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 706, a game area 707 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed. In the game area 707, a large number of nails for guiding the game balls are planted.

  An effect display device 709 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 707. In the effect display device 709, the variable display (variable display, update display, or patrol display) of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. The variable display of the effect symbol is executed in various variable modes such as a scroll display and a spot switching display. The effect display device 709 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each. In the effect display device 709, an effect symbol display area for displaying effect symbols on the display screen is provided, and in the effect symbol display area, for example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” are three (plural). ) There is a symbol display area as a display region for variably displaying the effect symbol. Each of these three effect symbols is an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. The effect display device 709 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the first special symbol display device 708a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 709 to perform the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display device 708b, since the effect display is executed by the effect display device along with the variable display, it is possible to easily grasp the progress status of the game.

  On the left side of the upper part of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, there is a first special symbol display device (first variation display means) 708a that variably displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. It is provided. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 708a is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of displaying the numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. That is, the first special symbol display 708a is configured to variably display the numbers (or symbols) 0-9. On the right side of the upper part of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, a second special symbol display device (second variation display means) 708b that variably displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. It is provided. The second special symbol display device 708b is realized by a simple and small-sized display device that can variably display numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display device 708b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. In the present embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 708a and the second special symbol display device 708b may be respectively configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 708a and the second special symbol indicator 708b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator. As for the first special symbol, the variable display is executed on condition that the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed on the second special symbol display device 708b. The second special symbol, the variable display is executed on condition that the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed on the first special symbol display 708a. That is, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed at the same time, but one of them is variably displayed.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 713 or the second starting winning opening). After having won the prize 714), the start condition of the variable display (for example, the number of pending storage is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed, and, , The state where the big hit game is not executed) is started, and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed when the variable display time (variation time) elapses. In addition, the winning is that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening (the game ball has entered). Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

  In the following description, the game ball winning the first starting winning opening 713 may be referred to as a first starting winning prize, and the gaming ball winning the second starting winning prize 714 is referred to as a second starting winning prize. There are cases. The start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. The data regarding the variable display is reserved and stored as the reserved storage data which is the right to perform the variable display of the special symbol until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the pending storage data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 755 of the game control microcomputer 7560 described later. The first start winning award holding storage data is stored in the first holding storage buffer as a first holding storage data with a predetermined number (for example, 4) being an upper limit, and the second starting winning hold holding data is a predetermined number (for example, 4). Number) is stored as the second reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer.

  The pachinko gaming machine 700 is provided with a hit ball launching device that drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a hit ball operation handle 705, and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to shoot a game ball to the game area 707. Has been. The game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 707 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 707, and then descends from the game area 707. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 713 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 713a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first (1 start condition is satisfied), the first special symbol display 708a the first special symbol variation display (variation) is started, and the effect display device 709 variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) is started. To be done. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 713. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 714 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 714a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 2 start condition is satisfied), the variable display of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 708b, and the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) is started on the effect display device 709. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 714. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 709, during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a, and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b, for decoration (production Variable display of the effect design (decorative design) as the design (for) is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. The synchronization means that the start time and the end time of the variable display are almost the same (or the same), and the period of the variable display is almost the same (or the same). Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 708a, and when the big jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 708b, a production symbol that reminds the big hit on the effect display device 709. The combination of is stopped and displayed. The first special symbol display device 708a, the second special symbol display device 708b, and the effect display device 709 described above are variable display devices that perform variable display of identification information and derive and display the display result, and are used as a variable display unit. Be done.

  In the effect display device 709, when the variable display is started, for example, all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols start the variable display. Then, the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are variably displayed basically stop in a predetermined order (for example, a predetermined order such as the order of the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol, and the middle effect symbol). , When a predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of variation display, all the effect symbols on the left, middle, and right are stopped, and the display result is fixed. The order in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are stopped may be an order other than the order of the left, right, and middle symbols. Further, the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be stopped at the same time.

  Below the effect display device 709, a winning device having a first start winning port 713 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 713 is guided to the back surface of the game board 706 and detected by the first starting opening switch 713a.

In addition, a variable winning ball device (electric tulip) having a second starting winning opening 714 (second starting opening) capable of winning game balls under the winning device having a first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 713. ) 715 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 714 is guided to the back surface of the game board 706 and detected by the second starting opening switch 714a. The variable winning ball device 715 is opened by a solenoid 716. By opening the variable winning ball device 715, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second start winning port 714 (it becomes easy to start winning), which is in an advantageous state for the player. When the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, the game balls are easier to win in the second starting winning port 714 than in the first starting winning port 713. Also, in the state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning hole 714. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win the prize, it may be possible to win the prize (that is, the game ball is hard to win). As described above, the state in which the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is difficult to win in the second start winning hole 714 or does not win. Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 713 and the second starting winning opening 714 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 715 is extremely easy to win the second start winning port 714. Although the first start winning opening 713 is provided directly below the effect display device 709, the distance between the lower end of the effect displaying device 709 and the first starting winning opening 713 can be further reduced, or the first starting winning opening 713 can be obtained. The nails are densely arranged around 713, or the arrangement of the nails around the first starting winning opening 713 is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 713, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 714 The winning rate of the first starting winning port 713 may be set higher.

  At the lower part of the first special symbol display device 708a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 713, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as a starting memory or a starting winning memory) is displayed 4. A first special symbol reservation storage display 718a including one display (for example, LED) is provided. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 718a increases the number of the indicator which lights up each time there is an effective starting winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 708a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  In the lower part of the second special symbol display 708b, the second special symbol hold consisting of four indicators (for example, LED) that display the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 714, that is, the second hold storage number. A memory display 718b is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 718b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 708b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 709 is provided with a first reservation storage display section 718c for displaying the first reservation storage number and a second reservation storage display section 718d for displaying the second reservation storage number. (Each display area is provided). An area (total reserved memory display unit) may be provided to display the total number (total reserved memory number), which is the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In this way, if the total pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the variable winning ball apparatus 715 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 714 is provided. However, the first starting winning opening 713 and the second starting A variable winning ball device that opens and closes any of the winning openings 714 may be provided.

  A reach state may occur during variable display of effect symbols on the effect display device 709. Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 709 form a part of the combination of the big hit symbols, the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed are continuously changed. It is a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or a part of the combination of the big hit symbols. In other words, the reach means a state in which the identification information constitutes the specific display result in the plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable areas is in the variable display. In the present embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are referred to as reach forming symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is the reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, at the time of reach, an effect different from usual may be given by a lamp or a sound. This production is called reach production. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (a display that imitates a person or the like and is different from a design (a production design or the like)) is displayed, or a display mode (for example, a color or the like) of a background image of the production display device 709 is displayed. ) May be changed. The display of the character and the change of the display mode of the background are referred to as reach effect display. In addition, some of the reach are set so that a big hit is more likely to occur when they appear, as compared with a normal reach (normal reach), and there is a high degree of reliability of being a big hit. Such a special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 45, a special variable winning ball device 720 is provided below the variable winning ball device 715. The special variable winning ball device 720 is provided with an opening / closing plate and is capable of changing between an open state (first state) in which the game ball can win and a closed state (second state) in which the game ball does not win. Is. In the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 720 may be hard to win, but may be able to win (that is, the game ball is hard to win). In this way, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is in the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is difficult to win the special variable winning ball device 720 or does not win.

  The special variable winning ball device 720 is a solenoid in a specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 708a or the second special symbol indicator 708b. The open / close plate is controlled to be opened by 721, so that the special winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 723.

  In the big hit game state, the special continuous winning ball device 720 repeats the open state and the closed state, and repeats continuous control. In the repeat continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened is called a round. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of big hits are provided, and when it is decided to make a big hit, one of the big hit types is selected. In addition, in the present embodiment, the control example in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened only once in one round has been shown. The device 720 may be controlled to be opened.

  A normal symbol display 710 (not shown) is provided below the effect display device 709. The normal symbol display 710 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called normal symbols (for example, “◯” and “x”). When the game ball passes through the gate 732 and is detected by the gate switch 732a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 710 is started. In the present embodiment, the left and right lamps (the pattern can be visually recognized at the time of lighting) are alternately turned on to perform the variable display. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 710 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol “◯”), the variable winning ball device 715 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 715 is an advantageous state from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 714) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. Changes to.

  In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 710, a normal symbol reservation storage indicator 741 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 732 is provided. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 732, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 732a, the normal symbol hold storage display 741 increases the number of the lighted displays by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 710 is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one. The upper limit value of the number of ordinary figure reservation storages is four, and in the normal symbol reservation memory display 741, the display is turned on with these four upper limit values.

  Around the left and right sides of the game area 707 of the game board 706, decoration LEDs 725 that are displayed blinking during the game are provided, and at the bottom there is an outlet 726 into which a hit ball that has not been won is taken. Further, two speakers 727R and 727L for producing a sound effect or a sound as a predetermined sound output are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 707. A top frame LED 728a, a left frame LED 728b, and a right frame LED 728c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer peripheral upper part, the outer peripheral left part, and the outer peripheral right part of the game area 707. For example, the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c are related displays in the pseudo rendition as a repetitive variation pattern (each re-variation period (including the first variation period) in one variation period). When an effect such as an effect is executed), blinking control is performed.

  The repetitive fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect is executed after the specific effect display is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times from the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. . Here, the specific effect display is, for example, an effect display such as an effect display that changes again, and if it is an effect display that can be repeatedly performed a predetermined number of times, for example, an effect display other than the re-changing display such as a notice display. It may be. In the present embodiment, as an example of the repeated variation pattern, an example will be described in which a pseudo-variation variation pattern that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times with the re-variation as a specific effect display is used. Here, the pseudo-relation is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of pending storages are continuously performed, although it is originally one fluctuation corresponding to one pending storage. It is an abbreviation that indicates pseudo continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-relation is within the fluctuation time determined for one starting prize in order to make it appear as if the variable display (variable display) of the symbol is executed a plurality of times for one starting prize. Here, it means a special variation pattern (also referred to as variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all symbol strings (left, middle, right). For example, the larger the number of repeated executions of re-variation (also referred to as the number of times of pseudo-re-variation), the greater the reliability of a big hit (a big hit and a big hit for all selection ratios including a deviant hit). The degree of the ratio sometimes selected and the degree of the jackpot, that is, the degree of reliability of the jackpot are high. More specifically, the proportion selected when the jackpot is determined is high. In the pseudo-variation variation pattern, a combination of symbols temporarily stopped on the effect display device 709 is called a combination of temporary stop symbols. The combination of the temporary stop symbols is determined as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances from a plurality of types of chance eyes (hereinafter, referred to as pseudo consecutive chance eyes) including combinations of symbols other than the combination of the big hit symbols. In addition, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the reach state may be finally set and some reach effect may be executed.

  In addition, a prize ball LED 751 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame LED 728b, and a ball out LED 752 that is turned on when a supply ball is run out is provided near the right frame LED 728c. . The top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, the right frame LED 728c, and the decoration LED 725 are an example of a luminous body for effect provided in the pachinko gaming machine 700. It should be noted that, in addition to the above-mentioned various LEDs for production (for decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed. In addition, a prepaid card unit that enables the ball lending by inserting the prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 700.

  FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 731. Note that FIG. 33 also shows the payout control board 737, the effect control board 780, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 46, on the main board 731, a game control microcomputer 7560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 7560 includes a ROM 754 that stores a program for game control (game progress control) and the like, a RAM 755 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 756 that performs a control operation according to the program, and an I / O 757. In this embodiment, the ROM 754 and the RAM 755 are built in the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the game control microcomputer 7560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The 1-chip microcomputer has at least the RAM 755 in addition to the CPU 756, and the ROM 754 may be external or internal. The I / O 757 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 7560 further includes a random number circuit 7503 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  Since the CPU 756 in the game control microcomputer 7560 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 754, the following description indicates that the game control microcomputer 7560 (or CPU 756) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 756 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other boards than the main board 731.

  The random number circuit 7503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 7503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, the numerical data to be read has a random number generating function.

  The random number circuit 7503 has a selection setting function of an update range of numerical data (a selection setting function of an initial value and a selection setting function of an upper limit value), a selection setting function of an update rule of numerical data, and an update rule of a numerical data. It has various functions such as a selection switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 7560 has a function of setting the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 7560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 754 (the ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 7560). The numerical data thus obtained is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 7503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 reads numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 7503 when the start winning to the first starting opening switch 713a or the second starting opening switch 714a occurs, and starts fluctuation of special symbols and effect symbols. At times, it is determined based on the random R whether or not to make a big hit display result as a specific display result, that is, whether or not to make a big hit. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the game state is shifted to the big hit game state as a specific game state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 755 is a backup RAM serving as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 755 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the game state, that is, the data corresponding to the control state by the game control microcomputer 7560 (such as the value of the special symbol process flag and each of the reserved storage number counters) and the number of unpaid prize balls is a backup RAM. Stored in. The data according to the control state by the game control microcomputer 7560 is the data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure, etc., based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure etc. is there. Further, the data according to the control state and the data showing the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data showing the progress state of the game. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 755 is backed up by power supply.

  A reset signal from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 7560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like is mounted on the power supply board. It should be noted that when the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like becomes operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like becomes inoperative. Therefore, while the reset signal is at a high level, an allowance signal for allowing the operation of the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like is output, and while the reset signal is at a low level, the game control microcomputer is in progress. This means that an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the 7560 or the like is output. The reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling electric parts is mounted).

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value drops to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage decreases). When it is detected), a power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that fact is mounted. Further, a clear signal indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM has been operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560.

  Also, an input driver circuit for giving the game control microcomputer 7560 a detection signal from the gate switch 732a, the first starting opening switch 713a, the second starting opening switch 714a, the count switch 723, the general winning opening switch 711 and the collection passage sensor 712. 758 is also mounted on the main board 731. When the main board 731 receives the detection signals from the various switches, the main board 731 sends the prize ball signal for executing the payout of the prize balls according to the switches to the payout control board 737. When the payout control board 737 receives the prize ball signal, it drives the ball payout device 797 to pay out the prize ball according to the prize ball signal.

  The general winning opening switch 711 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 706, and detects, for example, a game ball that has entered a general winning opening (not shown) that is always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. It is a switch. Based on the fact that the game balls have been detected by the general winning opening switch 711, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, the collection passage sensor 712 is a transmissive optical sensor which is installed at a predetermined position of a common passage through which all the game balls collected by the pachinko gaming machine 700 pass and which detects the passage of the game balls.

  Also, the output circuit 759 that drives the solenoid 716 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 715 and the solenoid 721 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 720 that forms the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 7560 is mainly used. It is mounted on the substrate 731. Further, an information output circuit for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit game state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 731.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control means (composed of effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 780 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 7560 via the relay board 777. The control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 709 that variably displays the effect symbol is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation signal from the chance button 7111 is input to the effect control board 780, and the effect and the determination operation on each screen are executed according to the operation signal from the opportunity button 7111.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B are input to the effect control board 780, and the selection operation is performed on each screen or the like according to the operation signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B.

  The effect control board 780 has an effect control microcomputer including an effect control CPU and RAM. The RAM may be external. In the effect control board 780, the effect control CPU operates according to a program stored in the built-in or external ROM, and is input via the relay board 777 from the main board 731 (effect control INT signal). ), The effect control command is received via the input driver and the input port. Further, the effect control CPU causes the VDP (video display processor) to perform display control of the effect display device 709 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP that cooperates with the effect control microcomputer to control the display of the effect display device 709 is mounted on the effect control board 780. The VDP has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 709.

  The effect control CPU reads out necessary data from the character ROM in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing in advance character image data displayed on the effect display device 709, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol or the like (including an effect pattern). The effect control CPU outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP. The VDP executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU. The effect control CPU executes an effect in accordance with an operation signal input from the chance button 7111 and determines a selection item on each screen or the like. The effect control CPU selects a selection item on each screen or the like in accordance with the operation signal input from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B.

  The effect control board 780 is connected to a power supply circuit (not shown), and the effect control CPU of the effect control board 780 has a power supply monitoring function for monitoring that power is supplied from the power supply circuit. The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to an input driver (not shown) on the effect control board 780. The input driver allows the signal input from the relay board 777 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 780 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 780 to the relay board 777). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a means. Further, the effect control CPU outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 735 via an output port (not shown). Further, the effect control CPU outputs the sound number data to the sound output board 770 through the output port.

  In the lamp driver board 735, a signal for driving an LED is input to an LED driver (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The LED driver supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c. In addition, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 725 provided on the game board 706 side. If a light-emitting body other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light-emitting body is mounted on the lamp driver board 735.

  On the voice output board 770, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input driver. The voice synthesizing IC generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs to the speakers 727R and 727L audio signals obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesizing IC to a level according to the volume set by the volume control. The voice data ROM also stores control data corresponding to the tone number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the variation period of the effect symbol) in time series.

  In the pachinko machine 700 configured as described above, when the gaming ball wins the special winning opening during the jackpot gaming state, the fact is notified. Further, a net increase obtained by subtracting the number of game balls fired from the number of game balls paid out is counted at the start of the jackpot game state. When the net increase reaches the specified number (eg, 1000, 2500, 5000, 10,000) during the jackpot game state, the net increase is specified without notifying that the game ball has won the special winning opening. Notify that the number has been reached.

  When the net increase reaches the specified number, it is accompanied by a prize in the big winning opening, so by notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number, the player can make a big notification that the net increase has reached the specified number. It can be recognized at the same time that the game ball has won the winning opening. Further, by notifying only that the net increase has reached the specified number efficiently, it is possible to make more impression that the net increase has reached the specified number.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 700 as described above, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game state, the effect is notified by the effect display device 709 and the speakers 727R, 727L. Also, when the net increase reaches the specified number during the jackpot gaming state, the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening is notified by the speakers 727R and 727L, and the effect display device indicates that the net increase has reached the specified number. 709.

  As a result, even when each of the winning at the special winning opening and the fact that the net increase number has reached the specified number is notified, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 700 as described above, when a specific jackpot is won, the probability of jackpot occurrence is controlled to be higher than that in the normal gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished. .. Also, when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific round of the jackpot gaming state or during the jackpot gaming state, it is configured to notify whether or not the probability variation state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends. And when notifying only that when the game ball wins the special winning opening during the big hit game state, the effect display device 709 and the speakers 727R, 727L notify. In addition, when notifying whether or not the probability variation state is controlled, the effect display device 709 and the speakers 727R and 727L notify. Furthermore, when a game ball wins the big winning opening during the jackpot game state, it is notified to that effect, and at the same time when it is informed whether or not it is controlled to the probability fluctuation state, the prize is given to the big winning opening. The speakers 727R and 727L give notification, and the effect display device 709 gives notification as to whether or not the probability variation state is controlled.

  As a result, even when each of the winning at the special winning opening and the fact that the probability variation state is controlled is notified, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

[Effects of First to Third Embodiments and Modifications 1 to 4]
In the first embodiment, the fact that the payout has occurred is notified, and when the net increase reaches the specified number when the payout occurs, the net increase is set to the specified number without notifying that the payout has occurred. It is notified that it has reached (the part that performs the process of Sq4 in FIG. 21).
Therefore, when the net increase reaches the specified number, payout is also accompanied, so by notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number, the player has paid out together with the fact that the net increase has reached the specified number. Can be recognized at the same time. Further, by notifying only that the net increase has reached the specified number efficiently, it is possible to make more impression that the net increase has reached the specified number.

In the first embodiment described above, the first event is that the medals are paid out, and the second event is that the net increase number reaches the specified number (the part that determines Sq1 and Sq3 in FIG. 21).
Therefore, it is possible to make a more impressive impression that the net increase number for the payout of medals, which is advantageous for the player, has reached the specified number.

In the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 informs that the net increase has reached the specified number (the part that performs the process of Sq4 in FIG. 21).
Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the specified number.

In the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net increase does not reach the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 inform the generation of the payout (the process of Ss5 in FIG. 23). When the payout occurs and the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase has reached the specified number, and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred. It is notified (the part that performs the process of Ss4 in FIG. 23).
Therefore, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

In the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 informs that the net increase has reached the specified number (a part for performing the process of Ss4 in FIG. 23). ).
Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the specified number.

In the above-described second embodiment, the first event is that medals are paid out, and the second event is that the net increase number reaches the specified number (the part that determines Ss1 and Ss3 in FIG. 23).
Therefore, even when notifying that different events related to payout of medals, which are advantageous to the player, have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without obstructing the other notification.

In the third embodiment, when the payout occurs and the number of AT games is not increased, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 inform the fact that the payout has occurred (the portion performing the process of St5 in FIG. 26). ), When the payout does not occur and the AT game number is added, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 inform the fact that the AT game number is added (the portion for performing the processing of St7 in FIG. 26), and payout When the number of AT games is increased due to the occurrence of, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the number of AT games has been increased, and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that payout has occurred (St4 in FIG. 26). (Processing part).
Therefore, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

In the third embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies the player of the addition of the number of AT games, which has a higher priority of notification to the player than the occurrence of payout (a portion for performing the processing of St4 in FIG. 26).
Therefore, the number of AT games can be further impressed.

In the first modification, when the number of games after the AT reaches 50 games, the net increase number that has been counted until then is cleared, and the notification effect is performed again with respect to the specified number once the notification effect has been performed. This is regulated (in this example, the processing of Sh6 is not performed when Y in Sh4 of FIG. 28).
Therefore, for example, even though the AT is ended and the net increase is decreased and the net increase is below the specified number, the AT is controlled again before the number of games after the AT reaches 50 games, and the net increase is again the specified number. It is possible to prevent the player from making an impression that the number of medals has decreased after the AT has ended, such as when reaching AT.

In Modification 1, when the execution of the continuous effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the continuous effect is executed without executing the notification effect, and the notification effect is paid out again and the net increase reaches the specified number. 28 is executed (in this example, when Sh5 is Y in FIG. 28, Sh6 is not processed, and when Sh5 is N, Sh6 is processed).
Therefore, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow in which the notification effect is executed when the payout of medals occurs is not broken, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable. it can.

In the second modification, when the execution of the addition effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the notification effect is executed without executing the addition effect, and when the addition condition is satisfied and the addition lottery is performed, the addition is performed again. An effect is executed (in this example, the part that determines Sr5 in FIG. 31).
Therefore, even if the execution time of the addition effect is changed, the flow of the addition effect being executed when the addition condition is satisfied is not broken, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling discomfort. ..

In Modification Example 3, a continuous production of an effect pattern that is changed from the number notification effect 502 for notifying a predetermined number to the additional notification effects 504, 506 for notifying the number of additional games is executed as a continuous winning notification effect (in this example, 38 (B) and FIG. 38 (C)).
Therefore, it is easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the number of medals and the number of additional games than a slot machine that does not notify the number of additional games in the effect pattern for changing from the number notification effect to the continuous winning notification effect. It is possible to effectively inform that the AT is continuously won by the fact that the number of medals acquired after the start reaches a predetermined number.

In the modified example 4, after the replay display result is derived, the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is updated by the replay derivation time updating means and the next game can be started before the game medium. When the game medium is detected by the detection means, the game value stored in the game value storage means is updated (in this example, S40 of FIG. 40. In addition to the processing of S10 to S12 of FIG. 39, Further, after the bet number setting is completed and it is determined in S19 that the credit is possible, the processing is executed in S21 and subsequent steps (see FIG. 43 (c)).
Therefore, even after the re-play display result is derived, the game medium inserted is detected after the bet number is updated by the re-game derivation update means and the next game can be started. By being a medium, the game value can be updated according to the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated after the re-game display result is derived, before the bet number is set. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the replay display result is derived, without making the player feel uncomfortable. Also, delay control is performed after the re-game display result is derived, and the delay control is canceled by inserting the game medium and the detection result by the game medium detecting means being the release result. As a result, even when the number of bets is updated to the player by deriving the re-play display result, the next game cannot be started without inserting the game medium, and the game medium is inserted. This can make you think that the next game is ready to start.

In the modified example 4, after the re-game display result is derived, the re-game derivation time updating means starts the update of the bet number stored in the bet number storage means, and then the game medium detecting means. When the game medium is detected, the game value stored in the game value storage means is updated (in this example, refer to FIG. 44, [Allowable timing of insertion / settlement after replay prize] in the modified example. ] Column (a)))).
Therefore, even after the re-game display result is derived, the inserted game medium is the game medium detected after the re-game derivation time updating means starts updating the bet number. The game value can be updated according to the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated after the re-game display result is derived, before the bet number is set. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the replay display result is derived, without making the player feel uncomfortable. Also, delay control is performed after the re-game display result is derived, and the delay control is canceled by inserting the game medium and the detection result by the game medium detecting means being the release result. As a result, even when the number of bets is updated to the player by deriving the re-play display result, the next game cannot be started without inserting the game medium, and the game medium is inserted. This can make you think that the next game is ready to start.

In the modified example 4, the replay prize (in this example, replay, first to second replay) is generated (in this example, YES in S12 in FIGS. 39 to 41), and the game value is increased. The bet amount stored in the bet amount storage means is updated so that the next game can be started without using it (in this example, S14 and S15 in FIGS. 39 to 41).
According to this feature, when the re-game winning occurs, the next game can be started without using the game value.

  [Invention Included in the Above Embodiment]

[Invention Included in First Embodiment]
As a technique related to the first embodiment, for example, the probability of winning a replay is increased and the probability of winning a bonus or a small role is controlled to a replay time set to the same probability as in a normal time, and the player is played at the replay time. There is known a slot machine that displays the number of medals (net additional number) acquired by (see, for example, JP 2008-6223A (eg, paragraph [0070]). Further, for example, there is known a slot machine which displays the number of medals to be paid out when a small winning combination is won at a replay time which ends when a fixed number of medals are paid out (for example, JP-A-2009-5971). (See, for example, paragraph [0225], paragraph [0331], etc.).

  By the way, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-6223 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-5971, when the payout of medals is made, the payout number of the medals or the net increase number is notified, which is called a payout of medals. It also means that the occurrence of the event has been notified. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the cumulative occurrence of one event, and another event different from the one event occurs due to this, if the notification for each event is performed separately, the player It is difficult to recognize each notification at the same time, which may hinder the player's recognition of the notification.

  The invention included in the first embodiment has been made in view of such a problem, and one event has occurred even when another event occurs due to the cumulative occurrence of one event. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can recognize the above and further give an impression that another event has occurred.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the invention included in the first embodiment is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment),
Accumulation of a first event (for example, payout of a medal in the first embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a small winning combination in the first embodiment) and occurrence of the first event. Then, a second event different from the first event (for example, in the first embodiment, the net increase of medals reaches a prescribed number) can occur.
A first notification effect executing means for executing a first notification effect for notifying that the first event has occurred (for example, in the first embodiment, a portion for performing the processing of Sq5 in FIG. 21);

A second notification effect executing unit that executes a second notification effect that notifies that the second event has occurred (for example, in the first embodiment, a portion that performs the process of Sq4 in FIG. 21),
In the gaming machine, when the second event also occurs when the first event occurs, the first notification effect execution means does not execute the first notification effect, and the second notification effect execution means performs the second notification effect. Is executed (for example, in the first embodiment, when Sq3 in FIG. 21 is Y, a portion performing the process of Sq4).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the second event occurs, the first event also accompanies, so the player is notified of the occurrence of the second event by notifying that the second event has occurred by executing the second notification effect. It is possible to recognize at the same time that the first event has occurred along with the occurrence. In addition, by notifying only that the second event has occurred efficiently, it is possible to make a more impression that the second event has occurred.

[Regarding Inventions Included in Second and Third Embodiments]

  As a technique related to the second embodiment and the third embodiment, for example, the probability of winning a replay is increased, and the winning probability of a bonus or a small role is controlled to a replay time set to the same probability as in the normal time, and the replay is performed. There is known a slot machine that displays the number of medals (net additional number) acquired by a player at time (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-6223 (for example, paragraph [0070]). Further, for example, there is known a slot machine which displays the number of medals to be paid out when a small winning combination is won at a replay time which ends when a fixed number of medals are paid out (for example, JP-A-2009-5971). (See, for example, paragraph [0225], paragraph [0331], etc.).

  By the way, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-6223 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-5971, when the payout of medals is made, the payout number of the medals or the net increase number is notified, which is called a payout of medals. It also means that the occurrence of the event has been notified. Then, in the gaming machine that notifies that one event has occurred, when notifying that another event different from the one event has also occurred, it is possible that different events occur at the same timing. In this case, one notification may interfere with another notification unless the notification method is taken into consideration.

  The inventions included in the second embodiment and the third embodiment have been made by paying attention to such a problem, and even when notifying that each of different events has occurred, one notification is not the other notification. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can notify at the same timing without hindering.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the invention included in the second embodiment is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the slot machine 1 in the second embodiment),
A first event (for example, payout of a medal in the second embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a winning combination of a small combination in the second embodiment), and the first event occurs In addition, a second event different from the first event (for example, in the second embodiment, the net increase in medals reaches a prescribed number) can occur.
A first notification effect executing means (for example, in the second embodiment, which can execute a first notification effect (for example, a medal acquisition sound in the second embodiment) that notifies that the first event or the second event has occurred. Speakers 53, 54),
A second notification effect execution means (for example, the second notification effect execution unit (for example, the acquired number display and the specified number arrival display in the second embodiment) that notifies that the first event or the second event has occurred. In two embodiments, a liquid crystal display 51) is provided,
When the first event occurs and the second event does not occur, the first notification effect execution unit executes the first notification effect and the second notification effect execution unit executes the second notification effect, so that the first event The occurrence is notified (for example, in the second embodiment, the part that performs the process of Ss5 when Y in Ss1 and N in Ss3 in FIG. 23),
When the first event and the second event occur, one of the occurrences is notified by the execution of the first notification effect by the first notification effect executing means, and the other notification is notified by the second notification effect executing means of the other. Notification is made by execution of the effect (for example, in the second embodiment, a part that performs the process of Ss4 when Y in Ss1 and Y in Ss3 in FIG. 23).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the invention included in the third embodiment is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a slot machine 1 in the third embodiment),
A first event (for example, payout of a medal in the third embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a small prize is won in the third embodiment), and it occurs regardless of the occurrence of the first event. And a second event different from the first event (for example, in the third embodiment, the number of AT games added) can occur.
A first notification effect execution means (for example, a medal acquisition sound and an AT game number addition sound in the third embodiment) that notifies that the first event or the second event has occurred (for example, In the third embodiment, the speakers 53, 54),
A second notification effect execution means (for example, an acquired number display and an AT game number addition display in the third embodiment) that notifies that the first event or the second event has occurred (for example, In the third embodiment, a liquid crystal display 51) is provided,
When the first event occurs and the second event does not occur, the first notification effect execution unit executes the first notification effect and the second notification effect execution unit executes the second notification effect, so that the first event The occurrence is notified (for example, in the third embodiment, when Y in St2 and N in St3 in FIG. 26, the process of St5 is executed),
When the second event occurs and the first event does not occur, the first notification effect execution unit executes the first notification effect and the second notification effect execution unit executes the second notification effect, and thus the second event The occurrence is notified (for example, in the third embodiment, when N in St2 and Y in St6 in FIG. 26, the process of St5 is executed),
When the first event and the second event occur, one of the occurrences is notified by the execution of the first notification effect by the first notification effect executing means, and the other notification is notified by the second notification effect executing means of the other. Notification is given by execution of the effect (for example, in the third embodiment, a part that executes the process of St4 when Y is obtained in St2 and Y in St3 in FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

  [Regarding Modification of First Embodiment]

[Regarding the first event and the second event]
In the first embodiment described above, the first event is the payout of medals at the AT, and the second event is that the net increase number reaches the specified number at the AT. However, for example, the first event is given the number of games to be added to the AT. Then, the second event is added and the number of games reaches the specified number of games, or the first event is taken as the digestion of the game and the second event is taken as the exhausted number of games reaches the specified number of games, or The first event and the second event may be different from those in the above-described embodiment, for example, the first event may be an error and the second event may be the number of times the error has reached a specified number.

[About notification]
In the first embodiment, the example in which the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify the first event and the second event has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the speakers 53 and 54 and the effect LED 52. , A back lamp (for example, reel LED 55) arranged on the back side (inside) of the reel, a transmissive liquid crystal display arranged on the front side of the reel (a liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be viewed), a front door 1st event by means different from the above-described first embodiment, such as a lamp or LED attached to 1b or the like (for example, effect LED 52), vibration of the stop switch, ventilation from around the stop switch, change in temperature of the stop switch, etc. Also, the notification of the second event may be performed. In addition, the notification of the first event and the second event may be performed by using a part of a device having another function (for example, when performing an effect using the reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 causes the reel to be on the rear side). It has a function of illuminating from the), and may be provided by providing a device for performing only notification.

  [Regarding Modification of Second Embodiment]

[Regarding the first event and the second event]
In the second embodiment described above, the first event is the payout of medals at the AT, and the second event is that the net increase number reaches the specified number at the AT. However, for example, the first event is given the number of games to be added to the AT. Then, the second event is added and the number of games reaches the specified number of games, or the first event is taken as the digestion of the game and the second event is taken as the exhausted number of games reaches the specified number of games, or , The first event is the occurrence of an error, and the second event is the number of occurrences of the error reaches a specified number of times. The above-described embodiment may be adopted as long as the above occurs.

[About notification]
In the second embodiment, the example in which the notification of the first event and the second event is executed by the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53, 54 is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect LED 52, the rear side of the reel It is attached to a back lamp (for example, a reel LED 55) arranged on the (inside), a transmissive liquid crystal display arranged on the front side of the reel (a liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be seen), a front door 1b, and the like. Lamps and LEDs (for example, effect LED 52), vibration of the stop switch, ventilation from the surroundings of the stop switch, change in the temperature of the stop switch, and the like. You may notify. In addition, the notification of the first event and the second event may be performed by using a part of a device having another function (for example, when performing an effect using the reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 causes the reel to be on the rear side). It has a function of illuminating from the), and may be provided by providing a device for performing only notification. Note that, for example, the notification of the first event and the notification of the second event may be performed by different types of devices, or may be performed by a plurality of devices of the same type.

  [Regarding Modification of Third Embodiment]

[Regarding the first event and the second event]
In the third embodiment, the first event is the payout of medals at the AT, and the second event is the addition of the number of additional games for AT. However, for example, the first event is the addition of the number of additional games for AT. Two events are set as the net increase of medals reaches the specified number, or the first event is set as the digestion of the game and the second event is set as AT and the number of games is added, or the first event occurs as an error. However, the mode of the first event and the second event may be different from the above-described embodiment as long as it is not related to the first event and the second event, such as paying out the medal for the second event.

[About notification]
In the above-described third embodiment, an example in which the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 are used to notify the first event and the second event has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is attached to a back lamp (for example, a reel LED 55) arranged on the (inside), a transmissive liquid crystal display arranged on the front side of the reel (a liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be seen), a front door 1b, and the like. Lamps and LEDs (for example, effect LED 52), vibration of the stop switch, ventilation from the surroundings of the stop switch, changes in the temperature of the stop switch, and the like. You may notify. In addition, the notification of the first event and the second event may be performed by using a part of a device having another function (for example, when performing an effect using the reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 causes the reel to be on the rear side). It has a function of illuminating from the), and may be provided by providing a device for performing only notification. Note that, for example, the notification of the first event and the notification of the second event may be performed by different types of devices, or may be performed by a plurality of devices of the same type.

[About gaming machines]
In the above embodiment, the slot machine that sets the number of bets using medals and credits has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, using a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine. The invention according to claim 1 is realized by applying the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a slot machine for setting the number of bets and a slot machine of a complete credit type for setting the number of bets using only credits. It is possible. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, if one medal corresponds to five game balls and three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the bet number using.

  Further, in addition to a medal shooting mechanism such as a flow path switching solenoid 30 and a throwing medal sensor 31, a ball taking-in device for taking in a game ball, a taking-in ball for detecting a game ball taken in by the ball taking-in device In addition to a detection switch, in addition to a medal payout mechanism such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out a game ball, and a payout ball detection switch for detecting a game ball paid out by the ball payout device The slot machine in which the game can be played by setting the bet number using both the medal and the game ball, and the medal and the game ball are paid out when a prize is generated is shown in the above embodiment. The present invention can be realized by applying the configuration.

  Further, the present invention provides a home-use game machine or other computer device for activating game software (slot machine game, pachinko game machine game), and a mobile terminal for activating an installed mobile application (slot machine app, pachinko game machine application). It is also possible to configure it as a gaming machine.

1 slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 start switch 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch 41 main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
91 Sub control unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variably display multiple types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
After variably displaying the variable display unit, a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the display result,
A gaming value storage means for storing a gaming value that can be used for setting the number of bets,
Bet number storage means for storing the bet number set for one game;
Re-game derivation time setting means for setting the bet number so that the next game can be started without consuming the game value owned by the player when the re-game display result is derived,
Path switching means for switching the flow-down path of the game medium input by the player to the discharge side path discharged to the outside or the intake side path taken inside.
A switching control means for controlling the route switching means,
The slot machine is
When a game medium is thrown in by a player while a game is being played, it is also possible to update the bet number stored in the bet number storage means and the game value stored in the game value storage means. Without updating
When the player inserts a game medium after the game ends without deriving the replay display result, and the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is less than a predetermined upper limit number. The number of bets stored in the bet number storage means is updated, and when the upper limit number is reached, the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means is updated,
In the case where the game medium is input by the player after the replay display result is derived and the game is over until the number of bets is set by the replay derivation time setting means and the next game can be started, Neither the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means nor the game value stored in the game value storage means is updated, and the bet number is set by the re-game derivation setting means. When a game medium is input by the player after the game is started and the next game can be started, the game value stored in the game value storage means can be updated.
The switching control means,
After the game ends without deriving the replay display result, the game medium is loaded without determining whether or not the game value stored in the game value storage means has reached the upper limit number. Perform the first possible setting process for setting that it is possible,
After the replay display result is derived, the game is over, the bet number is set by the regame derivation time setting means, and before the determination of whether or not the insertion of the game medium is detected, the gaming value It is determined whether or not the gaming value stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit number, and when the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means has not reached the upper limit number, the game medium The second possible setting process for setting that it is possible to insert is executed, and when the game value stored in the game value storage means has reached the upper limit number, the game medium cannot be inserted. Performs the first impossibility setting process for setting that
After the bet number is set, when the insertion of the game medium is detected in a state where the game medium can be inserted, it is determined whether or not the game value stored in the game value storage means reaches the upper limit number. If it is determined that the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means reaches the upper limit number, a second impossibility setting process is performed to set that the insertion of the gaming medium is impossible,
After the game ends without deriving the re-play display result and the bet number stored in the bet number storage means reaches the upper limit number, the insertion of the game medium is detected in a state where the game medium can be inserted. Also, when the re-play display result is derived, the game ends, and the bet number is set by the re-game derivation time setting means, and then the insertion of the game medium is detected in a state where the game medium can be inserted. Also, when a game value stored in the game value storage means reaches a maximum number, it is determined by a common determination process, and the game value stored in the game value storage means is determined. When the number reaches the upper limit, the common second non-setting process is performed,
A common switching process is performed both when the first disable setting process is performed and when the second disable setting process is performed, thereby setting that the game medium cannot be loaded. In this case, the route switching means is controlled so that the flow-down route of the game medium input by the player becomes the discharge-side route,
By performing the common switching process both when the first possible setting process is performed and when the second possible setting process is performed, it is set that the game medium can be loaded. If there is, the route switching means is controlled so that the flow-down route of the game medium input by the player becomes the intake side route,
A first event that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a second event that can occur with the occurrence of the first event and that is different from the first event can occur;
A first notification executing unit capable of executing a first notification capable of specifying that the first event has occurred when the first event has occurred,
When the first event occurs, the second notification means capable of specifying that the first event has occurred can be executed by the second notification means, and when the second event occurs, the second event occurs. A second notification executing means capable of executing a third notification capable of specifying that
When the first event occurs and the second event does not occur, the first notification means executes the first notification, and the second notification means executes the second notification,
When the first event and the second event occur, the first notification means executes the first notification, the second notification means does not execute the second notification, and the third notification is issued. A slot machine to run.

Images